ECOLOGICAL RISK ASSESSMENT
       GUIDANCE FOR SUPERFUND:

PROCESS FOR DESIGNING AND CONDUCTING
     ECOLOGICAL RISK ASSESSMENTS
       U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
          Environmental Response Team
                Edison, NJ
              August 21,1996
           EXTERNAL REVIEW DRAFT

-------
Aucusi 21. 1996
                                                    DRAFT
                   ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
fRESERVEDl

-------
AUiZUS! 1
;996
DRAFT

-------
August :i. 1996	                                            DRAFT

                         TABLE OF CONTENTS


ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS  	        .           . .           . ,  . i

LISTS OF EXHIBITS. EXAMPLE BOXES, AND HIGHLIGHT BOXES  . .        . .  vii

LIST OF ACRONYMS      .         	        ...           . .  ix

PREFACE                 	           .   .   xi

INTRODUCTION:  ECOLOGICAL RISK ASSESSMENT FOR SUPERFUND    .  .    1-1
      Purpose  	     .  .   I-l
      Scope   	       . .          I-l
      Background	          	    	          I-l
      Definition of Ecological Risk Assessment	     . .  1-3
      The Ecological Risk Assessment Process	   1-3

STEP 1:  SCREENING-LEVEL PROBLEM FORMULATION AND ECOLOGICAL
      EFFECTS EVALUATION ...      	    1-1
      1.1   INTRODUCTION..          	      	          1-1
      1.2   SCREENING-LEVEL PROBLEM FORMULATION  	1-1
           1.2.1   Environmental Setting and Contaminants at the Site 	     . . 1-2
           1.2.2   Contaminant Fate and Transport	1-4
           1.2.3   Ecotoxicity and Potential Receptors	1-4
           1.2.4   Complete Exposure Pathways  . .    .    	     .     1-5
           1.2.5   Assessment and Measurement Endpoints	         .  . 1-7
      1.3   SCREENING-LEVEL ECOLOGICAL EFFECTS EVALUATION       . 1-9
           1.3.1   Preferred Toxicity Data   .   ...       	           1-10
           1.3.2   Dose Conversions      	         1-12
           1.3.3   Uncertainty .Assessment       ....                1-12
      1.4   SUMMARY  .  .              ...                       1-13

STEP 2:  SCREENING-LEVEL EXPOSURE ESTIMATE
      ANT) RISK CALCULATION         ..              .                .2-1
      2.1   INTRODUCTION            ..         .           . .           2-1
      2.2   SCREENING-LEVEL EXPOSURE ESTIMATES   ...         .2-1
           2.2.1   Exposure Parameters   	      	    .    . .  2-2
           2.2.2   Uncertainty Assessment	       . .  2-3
      2.3   SCREENING-LEVEL RISK CALCULATION	2-4
      2.4   SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION POLNT (SMDP)       ,   .   2-5
      2.5   SUMMARY       .  .          	        	2-6
                                    111

-------
August 21.  1996                                                      DRAFT

STEP 3:  BASELLNE RISK ASSESSMENT PROBLEM FORMULATION  .          . 3-1
      51   THE PROBLEM FORMULATION PROCESS                       3-1
      32   REFINEMENT OF PRELIMINARY CONTAMINANTS OF
           CONCERN ....           .     . .   .        	3-3
      3.3   LITERATURE SEARCH ON KNOWN ECOLOGICAL EFFECTS   .     3-4
      3.4   CONTAMINANT FATE AND TRANSPORT, ECOSYSTEMS
           POTENTIALLY AT RISK. AND COMPLETE EXPOSURE
           PATHWAYS                 .     .            ....          .3-4
           3.4.1  Contaminant Fate and Transport                         .   . 3-5
           3.4.2  Ecosystems Potentially at Risk    .              .         .   . 3-6
           3.4.3  Complete Exposure Pathways   ...               .   .        3-8
      3.5   SELECTION OF ASSESSMENT ENDPOINTS      	3-8
      3.6   THE CONCEPTUAL MODEL .AND TESTABLE HYPOTHESES   .    3-10
           3.6.1  Conceptual Model  	           	3-12
           3.6.2  Risk Questions	        	3-14
      3.7   SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION POLNT (SMDP)	3-15
      3.8   SUMMARY  ...        	         	     3-16

STEP 4:  STUDY DESIGN AND DATA QUALITY
      OBJECTIVE PROCESS ....          	           .             4-1
      4.1   ESTABLISHING MEASUREMENT ENDPOLNTS    	     4-2
           4.1.1  Species/Community/Habitat Considerations    	4-5
           4.1.2  Relationship of the Measurement Endpoints to the Contaminant
                 of Concern  	4-6
           4.1.3  Mechanisms of Toxicity  	    	4-7
      4.2   STUDY DESIGN	      	4-7
           4.2.1  Bioaccumulation and Field Tissue Residue Studies  ...    .        4-8
           4.2.2  Population/Community Evaluations  .       	          4-12
           4.2.3  Toxicity Testing        . .    . .       	      .    4-13
      4.3   DATA QUALITY OBJECTIVES AND STATISTICAL
           CONSIDERATIONS             ...                          4-15
           4.3.1  Data Quality Objectives                    ..              4-15
           4.3.2  Statistical Considerations                      .       .     4-15
      4 4   CONTENTS OF WORK PLAN .AND  SAMPLING .AND ANALYSIS
           PLAN  .  .                        .            	    4-16
           4.4.1  Work Plan   .                           	4-16
           4.4.2  Sampling and Analysis Plan 	        	    4-17
           4.4.3  Field Verification of Sampling  Plan and Contingency Plans    . .  4-18
      4.5   SCIENTIFICyMANAGEMENT DECISION POLNT (SMDP)  ...   .   4-19
      4.6   SUMMARY  	      	      4-19
                                    IV

-------
August 21. !^96	                                               DRAFT

STEP 5: FIELD VERIFICATION OF SAMPLING DESIGN       	5-1
      5 1    PURPOSE                                                 .   5-1
      52    DETERMINING SAMPLING FEASIBILITY          ....    .  .      .5-2
      5.3    SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION POINT (SMDP)     .   ...   5-3
      5.4    SUMMARY    ....        .       .         .   .          .   . 5-5

STEP 6: SITE INVESTIGATION . .         ....              .        . .   6-1 •
      6.1    INTRODUCTION       	       	        .... 6-1
      6.2    SITE INVESTIGATION	                      ...   6-1
            6.2.1  Changing Field Conditions    ....            .           .6-2
            6.2.2  Unexpected Nature or Extent of Contamination  	6-2
      6.3    ANALYSIS OF ECOLOGICAL EXPOSURES AND EFFECTS           6-3
            6.3.1  Characterizing Exposures     	     	      .   .  . 6-3
            6.3.2  Characterizing Ecological Effects  ....     	6-5
      6.4    SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION POINT (SMDP)	6-7
      6.5    SUMMARY	        	6-7

STEP 7: RISK CHARACTERIZATION  	        	7-1
      7.1    INTRODUCTION                                ..       .  .    7-1
      7.2    RISK ESTIMATION         	          	7-1
      7.3    RISK DESCRIPTION . .        	           	         .7-4
            7.3.1  Threshold for Effects on Assessment Endpomts	       7-4
            7.3.2  Additional Risk Information   . .           	    7-5
      7 4    UNCERTAINTY ANALYSIS     	       	7-5
            7 4.1  Categories of Uncertainty	         	7-6
            7.4.2  Tracking Uncertainties    .    ...        	7-6
      7.5    SUMMARY	       	7-7

STEP 8: RISK MANAGEMENT                .   .          	      8-1
      8.1    INTRODUCTION   .         	           ....            8-1
      8.2    ECOLOGICAL RISK MANAGEMENT IN SUPERFUND       .    .  . 8-1
            S.2.1  Other Risk Management Considerations          .              8-2
            8 2.2  Ecological Impacts of Remedial Options     .  .       .     .8-3
            8.2.3  Monitoring   .             ...              .        .8-3
      8.3    SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION POINT (SMDP)          .   8-4
      8.4    SUMMARY ...       ....            .                8-4
GLOSSARY    	      ....         	  Glossary-1


BIBLIOGRAPHY	              .      . Bibliography-1

-------
August 21. 1996                                                     DRAFT

APPENDIX A. EXAMPLE ECOLOGICAL RISK ASSESSMENTS

      Example 1:  Copper Sue     .            ..                           A-l
      Example 2:  Stream DDT Site        	           .        . .   A-9
      Example 3:  PCB Site                 ...           ...          A-16
APPENDIX B:  REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLING GUIDANCE DOCUMENT, VOLUME 3:
ECOLOGICAL

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).  1996.  Representative Sampling Guidance
      Document, Volume 3: Ecological.  Edison, NJ:  Environmental Response Team.
APPENDDC C:  SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDANCE ON LITERATURE SEARCH
APPENDIX D:  STATISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS
                                    VI

-------
August :i. 1996
                                            DRAFT
   LISTS OF EXHIBITS,  EXAMPLE  BOXES, AND HIGHLIGHT BOXES
List of Exhibits

      EXHIBIT I-1:  Ecological Risk Assessment Framework    	1-5
      EXHIBIT 1-2:  Eight-step Ecological Risk Assessment
            Process for Superfund   .       	                        .1-10
      EXHIBIT 1-3:  Steps in the Ecological Risk Assessment
            Process and Corresponding Decision Points in the
            Superfund Process	     	          .           .1-11
      EXHIBIT 1-4:  Ecological Risk Assessment Deliverables
            for the Risk Manager	1-12
      EXHIBIT 1-5:  Ecological Risk Assessment in the Remedial
            Investigation/Feasibility Study  (RI/FS) Process    	         . .  1-14
      EXHIBIT 1-1:  List of Sensitive Environments
            in the Hazard Ranking System    	       ...        .   .1-6
      EXHIBIT 6-1:  Analysis Phase  .         	         .              . .  6-4
      EXHIBIT 7-1:  Risk Characterization   	        . .            .     7-2

List of Example Boxes

      EXAMPLE BOX 1-1: Ecotoxicity-PCB Site ....          ...            .1-5
      EXAMPLE BOX 1-2: Complete Exposure Pathways for  Mammals-PCB Site .  .  1-8
      EXAMPLE BOX 3-1: Exposure Pathway Model-DDT Site	3-7
      EXAMPLE BOX 3-2: Potential for Food Chain Transfer-Copper
            and DDT Sites                    ....          . .             .   3-8
      EXAMPLE BOX 3-3: Assessment Endpomt Selection-DDT.
            Copper, and PCB Sites         ....             .               3-11
      EXAMPLE BOX 3-4: Description of the Conceptual Model-DDT Site      . .  3-12
      EXAMPLE BOX 4-1: Lines of Evidence-Copper Site       ..              .4-4
      EXAMPLE BOX 4-2: Selecting Measurement Endpoint^-DDT Site             4-6
      EXAMPLE BOX 4-3: Bioaccumulauon-DDT Site             .           .   4-8
      EXAMPLE BOX 4-4: Tissue Residue Studies-DDT Site   . .               .4-9
      EXAMPLE BOX 5-1: Field Venficauon of Sampling Plan-Copper Site       .5-4
      EX.AMPLE BOX 5-2: Field Venficauon of Sampling Plan-DDT Site           5-5
      EXAMPLE BOX 6-1: Fish Sampling Contingency Plan-DDT Site          .   6-2
List of Highlight Boxes

      HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-1:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-2:
The RI/FS Process	
Example Assessment Endpomts
1-2
1-6
                                      VII

-------
August II. 1996
                                                                        DRAFT
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-3:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-4:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-1
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-2:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-3:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-4:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-5:
                     Example Measurement Endpomts
                     Ecological Impact and Risk .Assessment
                     Screemng-le\el Risk Assessments
                     Industrial or Urban Settings
                     Exposure Pathway and Exposure Route
                     Non-Chemical Stre&sors
                     Data Hierarchy for Deriving Screening
      Ecotoxicuy Values             ....
HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-6: NOAEL Preferred to LOAEL
                     Area Use Factor  .
                     Hazard Index (HI) Calculation
                     Tienng an Ecological Risk Assessment  .
                     Environmental Fate and Exposure  .  .
                     Definitions: Null and Test Hypotheses  . .
                     Importance of Distinguishing Measurement
      from Assessment Endpoints	
HIGHLIGHT BOX 4-2: Terminology and Definitions      ....
HIGHLIGHT BOX 4-3: Elements of a QAPP
HIGHLIGHT BOX 6-1: Uncertainty in Exposure Models     ....
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 2-1:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 2-2:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 3-1:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 3-2:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 3-3:
      HIGHLIGHT BOX 4-1:
  1-6
  1-8
.  1-4
.  1-7
  1-9

 1-10
 1-11
  2-2
  2-5
  3-3
  3-5
3-15

  4-3
.  4-5
4-18
  6-5
                                      Vlll

-------
           1996
DRAFT
                             LIST OF ACRONYMS
AQUIRE.    U.S. EPA's AQUauc Information REtnevaJ database
ARAR:       Applicable or Relevant and Appropriate Requirements
ASTM:       American Society of Testing and Materials
BAF:        Bioaccumulation Factor
BCF:        Bioconcentration Factor
BIOSIS:      Biosciences Information Services
BTAG:       Biological Technical Assistance Group
CERCLA:    Comprehensive  Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act
CLP:        Contract Laboratory Program
DQO:        Data Quality Objective
EEC:        Estimated Environmental Concentration
EPA:        Environmental Protection Agency
FSP:         Field Sampling  Plan
FWS:        Fish and Wildlife Service
HEAST:      National Center for Environmental Assessment's Health Effects Assessment
             Summary Tables
HI:          Hazard Index
HQ:          Hazard Quotient
HSDB:       National Library of Medicine's Hazardous Substances Data Bank
IRIS:        EPA's Integrated Risk Information System
LOAEL:      Lowest-Observed-Adverse-Effect Level
NCP:        National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan
NOAEL.      No-Observed-Adverse-Effect Level
NRC:        National Research Council
NRDA:       Natural Resource Damage .Assessment
OERR:       U.S. EPA Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
OSC:        On-Scene Coordinators
OSWER:      U.S. EPA Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response
PA          Preliminary Assessment
PAH:        Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons
PCB:        Polychlorinated  Biphenyl compound
PRP:        Potentially Responsible Party
QAPP:       Quality Assurance Project Plan
QA/QC:      Quality Assurance and Quality Control
RBP:        Rapid Bioassessment Protocol
RI/FS:       Remedial Investigation/Feasibility Study
ROD:        Record of Decision
RPM:        Remedial Project Managers
SAP:        Sampling and Analysis Plan

-------
August I.. i^6	            DRAFT


SARA:      Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986
SI.          Sue Investigation
SMDP:      Scienufic/Management Decision Point
TOC:        Total  Organic Carbon
WP:        Work Plan

-------
August 21,  1996	                                    DRAFT

                                      PREFACE
       This document provides guidance on the process of designing and conducting
technically defensible ecological risk assessments in the Superfund Program.  It is intended to
promote consistency and a science-based approach within the Program, and is based on the
Frame-work for Ecological Risk Assessment (1992a) developed by the Risk Assessment Forum
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

       This document is directed to the site managers (i.e., On-Scene Coordinators [OSCs]
and Remedial Project Managers  [RPMs]) who are legally responsible for the management of
the site.  However, it is anticipated that ecological risk assessors, as well as all other
individuals with input to the ecological risk assessment, will use this document.

       Ecological  risk assessment is an integral part of the Remedial Investigation and
Feasibility Study (RJ/FS) process, which is designed to support risk management decision-
making for Superfund sites. The RI component of the process characterizes the nature and
extent of contamination at a hazardous waste site and  estimates risks to human health and the
environment posed by contaminants at  the site.  The FS component of the process develops
and evaluates remedial options.  Thus,  ecological risk  assessment is fundamental to the RI
and ecological considerations are also pan of the FS process.

       This document is intended to facilitate defensible and appropriately-scaled site-specific
ecological nsk assessments. It is not intended to determine the appropriate scale or
complexity of an ecological risk  assessment or to direct the user in the selection of specific
protocols or investigation methods.  Professional judgment is essential  in designing and
determining the data needs for any ecological risk assessment.  However, when the process
outlined  in this document is followed, a technically defensible  and  appropriately scaled site-
specific ecological nsk assessment should  result.

       Ecological  risk assessment is an interdisciplinary field drawing  upon environmental
toxicology, ecology, and environmental chemistry, as  well as other areas of science and
mathematics.  It is important that users of this document understand that ecological nsk
assessment is a complex, non-linear process, with many parallel activities.  The user should
have a basic understanding of ecotoxicology and ecological risk assessment and read through
this document in its entirety prior to engaging in the ecological risk assessment process.
Without  the basic  understanding  of the field and of this guidance, the reader might not
recognize the relationships among different components of the risk assessment process.

       To assist the user in interpreting this guidance  document, three illustrations of
hazardous waste sites are provided in Appendix A.  These are simplified, hypothetical site
examples that demonstrate and highlight specific points in the ecological risk assessment
                                            XI

-------
August 21.  1996	DRAFT

process.  These examples are incomplete and not intended to present a thorough discussion of
the ecological or ecotoxicological issues that would exist at an acruai sue.  Instead, they are
intended to illustrate the first five steps of the process that precede a full ecologicaJ field
investigation.  Excerpts from the three examples are included  in the guidance document as
"Example Boxes" to illustrate specific points. The user is encouraged to read the three site
examples in Appendix A in  addition to the Example Boxes within the guidance document
itself.

       Ecological risk assessment is a dynamic  field, and thus document represents a process
framework into which changes in ecologicaJ risk assessment approaches can readily be
incorporated.  Four appendices are  included with this document; additional appendices may be
developed to address specific issues.

       This document supersedes the U.S. EPA's (1989b) Risk Assessment Guidance for
Superfund,  Volume 2:  Environmental Evaluation Manual as guidance on how to design and
conduct an ecological risk assessment in the Superfund Program. The Environmental
Evaluation  Manual contains  useful  information on the statutory and regulatory basis of
ecological assessment, basic  ecological concepts, and other background information that is not
repeated  in this document.
                                           xn

-------
August 21. 1996    	                             DRAFT

                                INTRODUCTION:
          ECOLOGICAL RISK ASSESSMENT FOR SUPERFUND
PURPOSE

       This document provides guidance on how to design and conduct consistent and
technically defensible ecological risk assessments within the Superrand Program.  It is based
on the Framework for Ecological Risk Assessment (1992a) developed by the Risk Assessment
Forum of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA or the Agency).

       This document is directed to the site managers (i.e., On-Scene Coordinators [OSCs]
and Remedial Project Managers  [RPMs]) who are legally responsible for managing site
activities.  However, it is anticipated that the ecological risk assessors, as well as all other
individuals involved with ecological risk assessments, will use this document.
SCOPE

      This document is intended to facilitate defensible and appropriately-scaled site-specific
ecological risk assessments. It is not intended to dictate the scale, complexity, protocols, data
needs, or investigation methods for such assessments. Professional judgment is required to
apply the process outlined in this document to ecological risk assessments at specific sites.
BACKGROUND

Superfund Program

      The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act of
1980 (CERCLA or Superfund), as amended by the Superfund Amendments and
Reauthonzaiion Act of 1986 (SARA), authorizes the U.S. EPA to protect public health and
welfare and the environment from the release or potential release of any hazardous substance,
pollutant, or contaminant. U.S. EPA's Superfund Program carries out the Agency's mandate
under CERCLA/SARA.

      The primary regulation issued by U.S. EPA's Superfund Program is the National Oil
and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan (NCP). The NCP calls for the
identification and mitigation of the environmental impacts (such as  toxicity, bioaccumulation,
death, reproductive impairment, growth impairment, and loss of critical habitat) at hazardous
waste sites,  and for the selection of remedial actions to protect the  environment  In addition,
numerous other federal and state laws and regulations  concerning environmental protection

                                                             INTRODUCTION, Page 1

-------
August 21. 1996
                                                                                 DRAFT
can be designated under Superfund as 'applicable" or "relevant and appropriate" requirements
(ARARsj for parucuJar sues.  Compliance with these other laws and regulations generally
requires an evaluation of site-related ecological effects ar»d the measures necessary to mitigate
these effects.
                                                      HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-1
                                                       The Rl/FS  Process

                                                     Risk assessment is an integral pan of
                                              the RI/FS.  The three parts of the RJ are:  (1)
                                              characterization of the nature and extent of
                                              contamination; (2) ecological risk
                                              assessment; and (3) human health risk
                                              assessment.  The investigation of the nature
                                              and extent of contamination determines the
                                              chemicals present on site, as  well as their
                                              distribution and concentrations. The
                                              ecological nsk and human health  nsk
                                              assessments determine the potential for
                                              adverse effects to the environment and
                                              human health, respectively.
Risk Assessment  in Superfund

       An important  pan of the NCP is the
requirement for a Remedial Investigation
and Feasibility Study (Rl/FS)  (see Highlight
Box  I-1).  The RI/FS is an analytical
process designed to support risk
management decision-making  for Superfund
sites.  The RI component of the process
characterizes the nature and extent of
contamination at a hazardous waste site and
estimates nsks to  human health and the
environment posed by contaminants at the
site.  The FS component of the process
develops and evaluates remedial options.

       Although U.S. EPA has established
detailed guidelines for human  health risk
assessment  in the  Superfund program (U.S.
EPA, 1989a, 1991a,b), similarly detailed guidelines for site-specific ecological nsk assessment
do not exist for the Superfund program.  Risk Assessment Guidance for Superfund, Volume 2:
Environmental Evaluation Manual (U.S.  EPA. 1989b) provides conceptual guidance in
planning studies to evaluate a  hazardous  waste site's "environmental resources" (as used in
the manual,  'environmental resources" is largely synonymous with  'ecological resource:"}.
U.S.  EPA also is publishing supplemental information on specific ecological risk assessment
topics for Superfund  in the ECO Update senes (U.S. EPA, 1996a, 1995b, 1994b,c,d,e,
1992b,c.d, 1991c,d).  However, these documents do not describe an overall,  step-by-step
process by which an  ecological risk  assessment is  designed and executed. The Agency's
Framework for Ecological Risk Assessment (U.S. EPA,  1992a) provides a basic structure and
a consistent approach for conducting  and evaluating ecological nsk assessments, but does  not
address Superfund or other  specific Agency programs.  The Guidelines for Ecological Risk
Assessment, currently being developed by the  Agency's Risk Assessment Forum, will  expand
on the Framwork, but again, will not address specific U.S. EPA programs.

       This document outlines a step-by-step ecological  risk assessment process that is both
specific to the Superfund Program and consistent with the more general U.S. EPA Framework
and guidelines under development.  While the Agency's Framework and future Agency-wide
INTRODUCTION, Page 2

-------
August 21. 1996	               DRAFT

ecological risk assessment guidelines are not enforceable regulations, the concepts in these
documents are appropriate to Superfund. The concepts in the published Framework have
been incorporated into this document with minimal modification.  The definitions of terms
used in this ecological risk assessment guidance for Superfund (and listed in the Glossary) are
consistent with the definitions in the U.S. EPA Framework document.
DEFINITION OF ECOLOGICAL RISK ASSESSMENT

U.S.  EPA " Framework" Document

       Ecological risk assessment  is defined in the Framework as a process that evaluates the
likelihood that adverse ecological effects are occurring or may occur as a result of exposure
to one or more stressors (U.S. EPA, 1992a). The Framework defines a stressor as any
physical, chemical, or biological entity that  can induce an adverse ecological response.
Adverse responses can range from sublethal chronic effects in an individual organism to a
loss of ecosystem function.  Although stressors can be biological (e.g., introduced species),
only chemical or physical stressors will be addressed in this document, because these are the
stressors subject to risk management decisions at Superfund sites.

Superfund Program

       The phrase "ecological risk assessment," as used specifically for the Superfund
Program in this document, refers to a qualitative and/or quantitative appraisal of the  actual or
potential impacts of contaminants from a hazardous waste site on plants and animals other
than humans and domesticated species. A risk does not exist unless:  (1) the stressor has the
ability to cause one  or more adverse effects, and (2) it co-occurs with or contacts an
ecological component long enough and at a sufficient intensity to elicit the identified adverse
effect.
THE ECOLOGICAL RISK ASSESSMENT PROCESS

U.S. EPA "Framework" Document

       The Framework describes the basic elements of a process for scientifically evaluating
the adverse effects of stressors on ecosystems and components of ecosystems. The document
describes the basic process and principles to be used in ecological risk assessments conducted
for the U.S.  EPA, provides operational definitions for terms used in ecological risk
assessments, and outlines basic principles around which program-specific guidelines for
ecological risk assessment should be organized.
                                                                INTRODUCTION, Page 3

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

       The Framework is similar to the National Research Council's (NRC) paradigm for
human health nsk assessments (NRC, 1983) and the more recent NRC ecological nsk
paradigm (NRC, 1993).  The  1983 NRC paradigm consists of four fundamental phases:
hazard identification, dose-response assessment, exposure assessment, and nsk
characterization. The Framework differs from the 1983  NRC paradigm in a few ways:

       •      Problem formulation is incorporated into the beginning of the process to
             determine the focus and scope of the assessment;

       •      Hazard identification and dose-response assessment are combined in an
             ecological effects assessment phase; and

       •      The phrase "dose-response" is replaced by "strcssor-response" to emphasize the
             possibility that physical changes (which are not measured in "doses") can stress
             ecosystems as well as chemical contamination.

Moreover, the Framework emphasizes the parallel nature of the ecological effects and
exposure assessments by joining the two assessments in an analysis phase between problem
formulation and nsk characterization,  as shown in Exhibit 1-1.

       During problem formulation, the risk assessor establishes  the goals, breadth, and focus
of the assessment (U.S. EPA,  I992a). As indicated in  the Framework, problem formulation is
a systematic planning step that identifies the major factors to  be considered and is linked  to
the regulatory and policy contexts of the assessment.  Problem formulation includes
discussions between the lead risk assessor and lead risk manager,  and other involved parties,
to identify the stressor characteristics, ecosystems potentially  at nsk,  and ecological effects to
be evaluated. During problem formulation, assessment and measurement endpoints for the
ecological nsk assessment are identified, as described below.

       The Agency defines assessment endpoints as explicit expressions of the actual
environmental values (e.g., ecological resources) that are to be protected (U.S. EPA,  1992a).
Valuable ecological  resources  include those without which ecosystem function would be
significantly impaired, those providing cntical resources (e.g., habitat, fisheries), and those
perceived as valuable by humans (e.g., endangered species and other issues addressed by
legislation).  Because assessment endpoints focus the nsk assessment design and analysis,
appropnate selection and  definition of these endpoints  are cntical to  the utility of a risk
assessment.

       Assessment endpoints  should relate to statutory mandates  (e.g., protection of the
environment), but must be specific enough to guide the development of the risk assessment
study design at  a particular site.  Useful assessment endpoints define both the valued
ecological entity at the site (e.g., a species, ecological  resource, or habitat type) and a


INTRODUCTION, Page 4

-------
August 21. 1996
DRAFT
                               EXHIBIT 1-1
          Ecological Risk Assessment Framework (U.S. EPA, 1992a)

Discussion
Between the
Risk Assessor
and
Risk Manager
(Planning)



Ecological Risk Assessment



PRO

A
N
A
L
Y
S
I
S

BL
^*^m
EM FORMULA


TION




_. . . .. : Characterization
Characterization •
, : of
_ ° : EcologcaJ
Exposure ; ^


\
RISK

V
Cl






7 V
HARACTERIZAT1ON
t










1
S
>
o
.0
c
(0
tion; Verification and Monitoring

                                 Discussion Between the
                             Risk Assessor and Risk Manager
                                       (Results)
                                         i
                                   Risk Management
                                                      INTRODUCTION, Page 5

-------
August 21. 1996
                                                                             DRAFT
characteristic! s) of the entity to protect (e.g., reproductive success, production per unit area,
area! extent). Highlight Box 1-2 provides some examples of specific assessment endpoints
related to the general goal of protecting
aquatic ecosystems.
       A measurement endpoint is a
measurable biological response to a stressor
that can be related to the valued
characteristic chosen as the assessment
endpoint (U.S. EPA. 1992a).  Sometimes,
the assessment endpoint can be measured
directly; usually, however, an  assessment
endpoint encompasses too many species  or
species that are difficult to evaluate (e.g.,
top-level predators).  In these  cases, the
measurement endpoints are different from
the assessment endpoint, but can be used to
make inferences about risks to the
assessment endpoints. For example,
measures of responses in particularly sensitive species and life stages might be used to infer
responses in the remaining species and lifestages in a specific community. Highlight Box 1-3
                                             provides examples of measurement
                                                   HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-2
                                            Example Assessment Endpoints

                                            •    Aquatic community structure,
                                                 including  species composition and
                                                 relative abundance  and trophic
                                                 structure.

                                            •    Survival, growth, and reproduction
                                                 of fish, aquatic invertebrates, and
                                                 algae.

                                            •    Fishery diversity and abundance.
                                             endpoints.

                                                    Measures of exposure also can be
                                             used to make inferences about nsks to
                                             assessment endpoints at Superfund sites.
                                             For example, measures of water
                                             concentrations of a contaminant can be
                                             compared with concentrations known  from
                                             the literature to  be lethal to sensitive aquatic
                                             organisms to infer something about nsks to
                                             aquatic community structure.

                                                    The  outcome of problem formulation
                                             is a conceptual  model that describes how a
given stressor might affect ecological components  of the environment  The  conceptual model
also describes questions about how stressors affect the assessment endpoints, the relationships
among the  assessment and measurement endpoints, the data required to answer the questions,
and the methods that will be used to analyze the data (U.S. EPA,  1992a).
       HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-3
Example Measurement Endpoints

 •    Community analysis of benthic
      mac rom vertebrates.

 •    Survival and growth of fish fry m
      response to exposure to copper.

 •    Community structure of fishery in
      proximity to the site.
INTRODUCTION, Page 6

-------
 August 21. 1996      	DRAFT

 Superfund Program

       The goal of the ecological nsk assessment process in the Superfund Program is to
 provide the nsk information necessary to assist risk managers at Superfund sites (OSCs and
 RPMs) in making informed decisions regarding substances designated as hazardous under
 CERCLA (see 40 CFR 302.4). The specific objectives of the process, as stated in OSWER
 Directive 9285.7-17, are:  (1)  to identify and characterize the current and potential threats to
 the environment from a hazardous substance release; and (2) to identify clean-up levels that
 would protect those natural resources from nsk.  Threats to  the environment include existing
 adverse ecological impacts and the risk of such impacts in the future. Highlight Box 1-4
 provides an overview of ecological risk assessment in the Superfund Program.

       Problem formulation is the most critical step of an ecological risk assessment and must
 precede any attempt to design  a site investigation and analysis plan.  To ensure that the risk
 manager can use  the results of an ecological risk assessment to inform risk management
 decisions for a Superfund  site, it is important that all involved parlies contribute to the
 problem formulation phase. These parties include the site manager, the ecological risk
 assessment team, the Regional Superfund Biological Technical Assistance Group (BTAG),
 potentially responsible  parties (PRPs), Natural  Resource Trustees, and any stakeholders  in the
 natural resources  at issue (e.g., local communities, state agencies) (U.S. EPA, 1994a, 1995b).
 The U.S. EPA's (1994a) Edgewater Consensus on an EPA Strategy for Ecosystem Protection
 in particular calls for the Agency to develop a  "place-driven" orientation, that is, to focus on
 the environmental needs of specific communities and ecosystems, rather than  on piecemeal
 program mandates. Participation in problem formulation by all involved parties helps to
 achieve the place-driven focus.

       Issues such as restoration, mitigation, and replacement are important to the Superfund
 Program, but arc reserved  for investigations that might or might not be included in the RJ
 phase. Dunng the risk management process of selecting the preferred remedial option leading
to the Record of Decision  (ROD), issues of mitigation and restoration should  be addressed.
 In selecting a remedy, the  risk manager must also consider the degree to which the remedial
alternatives reduce risk and thereby  also reduce the need for restoration or mitigation.

       A natural resource  damage assessment (NRDA) can  be conducted at any Superfund
 site at the discretion of Natural Resource  Trustees for specific resources associated with a
 site.  An ecological risk assessment is a necessary step for an NRDA, because it establishes
the causal link between site contaminants and specific adverse ecological effects necessary for
 an NRDA. The  assessment also can provide information on what residual nsks are likely for
different remediation options.  However, the ecological risk assessment does not constitute a
complete NRDA.  The portion of the NRDA beyond the risk assessment is the sole
 responsibility of the Natural Resource Trustees, not of the U.S. EPA; therefore, natural
 resource damage assessment will not be  addressed  in this guidance.  For additional


                                                                 INTRODUCTION, Page 7

-------
August :i. 1996	DRAFT

information on the role of Natural Resou.ce Trustees in the Superfund process, see ECO
Update Volume I.  dumber 3 (U.S. EPA,  1992c).
                                     HIGHLJGHT BOX 1-4
                         Ecological Impact and Risk Assessment

            Ecological nsk assessment within the Superfund Program can be a risk evaluation
     (potentially predictive),  impact evaluation, or a combination of these approaches. The
     functions of the ecological nsk assessment are to:

            (I)     Document whether actual or potential ecological risk exists at a site;

            (2)     Identify which contaminants present at a site pose an ecological risk; and

            (3)     Generate data to  be used in evaluating clean-up options.

     Ecological nsk assessments can have their greatest influence on nsk management at a site in
     the evaluation and selection of site remedies.  The ecological nsk assessment should identify
     contamination levels that bound a threshold for adverse effects on the assessment endpomt.
     The threshold values provides a "yard stick" for evaluating the effectiveness of remedial
     options, and can be used to set clean-up goals if appropriate.

            To justify a site action based upon ecological concerns, the  ecological risk assessment
     must establish that an actual or potential ecological threat exists at a site.  The potential for
     (i.e.,  nsk  of) impacts can be the threat of impacts from a future release or redistribution of
     contaminants, which could be avoided by taking actions on "hot spots" or source areas.
     "Risk"  also  can be viewed as the likelihood that current impacts are occurring, although they
     are difficult to demonstrate (e.g., diminished population size).  For example, it may not be
     practical or  technically possible to document existing ecological impacts, either due  to limited
     technique resolution, the  localized nature of the actual impact, or limitations resulting from
     the biological or ecological constraints of the  field measurements (i.e., measurement
     endpomis. exposure point evaluation). Actually demonstrating existing impacts confirms that
     a "nsk" exists. Evaluating a gradient of existing  impacts along a gradient of contamination
     can provide an stressor-response  assessment that helps to identify ;ltan-up levels.

            As  rxxed above, the ecological nsk assessment should provide the information needed
     to make nsk management decisions (i.e., to select the appropriate site remedy).  The
     ecological nsk assessment, however, should nc* be used to justify a particular management
     option.
INTRODUCTION, Page 8

-------
August 21,  1996	                                                         DRAFT

This Guidance Document

       This ecological risk assessment guidance for Superfund is composed of eight steps
(see Exhibit 1-2) and several  scientific/management decision points (SMDPs) (see Exhibit
1-3).  An SMDP requires a meeting between primary risk managers and risk assessors to
evaluate and approve or redirect the work up to that point. (Consultation with the Regional
BTAG is recommended for SMDP's (a) through (d) in Exhibit 1-3.)  The group decides
whether or not the risk assessment is proceeding in a direction that is acceptable to the risk
assessors and  managers.  The SMDPs include a discussion of  the uncertainty associated with
the risk assessment, which can be reduced, if necessary, with  increased effort. SMDPs are
significant  communication points which should be passed with the consensus of all involved
parties.  The risk manager should expect deliverables that document specific SMDPs as
outlined in Exhibit 1-4.  This  approach is intended to minimize both the cost of and time
required Tor the Superfund risk assessment process.

       This guidance provides a technically valid approach for ecological risk assessments at
hazardous waste sites, although other approaches also can be valid. The discipline of
ecological risk assessment is  dynamic and continually evolving; the assessments rely on data
that are complex and sometimes  ambiguous.  However, if an approach other than the one
described in this guidance document is used, there must be clear documentation of the
process, including process design and  interpretation of the results, to ensure a technically
defensible assessment.  Clear documentation, consistency, and objectivity in the assessment
processes ore necessary for the Superfund Program.

       This guidance document does not eliminate the need for scientific expertise and
professional judgment  An interdisciplinary team (including, but not limited to, biologists,
ecologists,  and environmental lexicologists) is needed to design and implement a successful
risk assessment and to evaluate the weight of the evidence obtained to reach conclusions
about ecological risks.  Some of the many points at which the Superfund ecological risk
assessment process requires professional judgment include:

       •       Determining the level of effort needed to assess ecological risk at a particular
              site;

       •       Determining the relevance of available data to the nsk assessment;

       •       Designing a conceptual model of the ecological threats at a site and measures
              to assess those threats;

       •       Selecting methods and  models to be used in the various components of the risk
              assessment;
                                                                 INTRODUCTION, Page 9

-------
Aueusi I!. 1996
                                                    DRAFT
                                     EXHIBIT 1-2
          Eight-step Ecological Risk Assessment Process for Superfund
I!
uJ  ^
D  C
"II
O ~
O
        c
        O
                                        . L ^-i
                           STEP 1: GCDCCTMIMO LCVEL
                            •  Site Visit
                            •  Problem Formulation
                            •  Toxiaty Evaluaoon
STEP 2: SCniElf
 •  Exposure Esomat*
 •  Risk Calculation
                                             LgV'El:
                        STEP 3:  PROBLEM FORMULATION
                                To«cav Evaluation
                              t
                      Ass«ssm«m
                       Enaoomts
                                                    Moo**
                              QuestionvHypotti«»«i
                    STEP 4- STUDY DESIGN AND DQO PROCESS
                            •  Unes of Evidence
                            •  Measurement Endpomts
                      Work Plan and Sampling and Analysis Plan
                         STEPS: VERIFICATION OF FIELD
                                SAMPLING PLAN
                        STEPS:  SITE INVESTIGATION AND
                                DATA ANALYSIS
                        STEP 7-  RISK CHARACTERIZATION
                                        Risk Assessor
                                      and Risk Manager
                                         Agreement
STEP 8:
RISK MANAGEMENT
^ SMDP

INTRODUCTION, Page 10

-------
August 21. 1996
DRAFT
                                      EXHIBIT 1-3
                 Steps in the Ecological Risk Assessment Process
          and Corresponding  Decision Points in the Superfund Process

  Steps and Scientific/Management Decision Points (SOMPs):

         1.      Screening-Level Problem Formulation and Ecological
                Effects Evaluation

         2.      Screening-Level Preliminary Exposure Estimate and
                Risk Calculation                                        SMDP (a)

         3.      Problem Formulation                                    SMDP (b)

         4.      Study Design                                          SMDP (c)

         5.      Verification of Field Sampling Plan                        SMDP (d)

         6.      Site Investigation and Analysis of Exposure
                and Effects                                            [SMDP]

         7.      Risk Characterization

         8.      Risk Management                                       SMDP (e)

  Corresponding Decision  Points in the Superfund  Process:

         (a)     Decision about whether a full ecological risk assessment
                is necessary.

         (b)     Agreement among the risk assessors, risk manager, and
                other involved panics on the assessment endpoints, conceptual
                model, exposure pathways, and questions or risk hypotheses.

         (c)     Agreement among the risk assessors and risk manager on the
  measurement endpoints, study design, and data interpretation and            analysis.

         (d)     Signing approval of the work plan and sampling and analysis plan for the
                ecological risk assessment.

         (e)     Signing the Record of Decision.

         [SMDP] only if change to the sampling and analysis plan is necessary.
                                                                INTRODUCTION, Page 11

-------
Auenst 21. 1996                                                                    DRAFT
                                      EXHIBIT 1-4
                     Ecological  Risk Assessment Deliverables
                                for the,Risk Manager

   If the process stops at the end  of Step 2:

         111     Full documentation of the screening-level assessment and SMDP not to continue
                the assessment.

   If the process continues to  Step 3:

         (1)     Documentation of the assessment endpoints, conceptual model, exposure
                pathways, nsk hypotheses, and SMDP at the end of Step 3.

         (2)     The approved and signed work plan and sampling and analysis plan,
                documenting the SMDPs at the end of Steps 4 and 5.

         (3)     The baseline nsk assessment documentation (including documentation of the
                screening-level assessment used in  the baseline assessment) developed in Step 7.
       •      Developing assumptions for toxiciry and exposure assessments based on logic
             and scientific principles to fill data gaps; and

       •      Interpreting the ecological significance of observed or predicted effects.

The lead nsk assessor should coordinate with appropriate professionals to make many of these
decisions. Specialists are needed for the more technical questions concerning the nsk
assessment (e.g., which model, which assumptions).

       After the nsk assessment is complete, the risk manager rrught require additional
professional  assistance in interpreting the implications of the baseline ecological risk
assessment and selecting a remedial option.  This guidance document focuses on the nsk
assessment process in Superfund, and does not address all of the issues that a risk manager
will need to  consider.

       The nsk assessment  process must be structured to ensure that site management
decisions can be made without the need for repeated studies or delays.  The first two steps in
the assessment process are a streamlined version of  the complete Framework process and are
intended  to allow a rapid determination by the risk assessor and risk manager that the site
poses no or negligible ecological nsk, or to identify  which contaminants and exposure
INTRODUCTION, Page  12

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

pathways require further evaluation.  Steps 3 through 7 are a more detailed version of the
complete Framework process.

       The ecological risk assessment process  should be coordinated with the overall RI/FS
process to the extent possible.  Overall site assessment costs are minimized when the needs of
the ecological and human health risk assessments are incorporated into the chemical sampling
program to determine the nature and extent of  contamination during the RI.  For sites at
which an RI has not yet been planned or conducted. Exhibit 1-3 illustrates the relationship
between the eight ecological risk assessment steps and the SMDPs described in this guidance.
Exhibit 1-5 illustrates the relationship between  the eight ecological risk assessment steps and
the overall Superfund process and decision points.  For older sites at which an RI was
conducted before an ecological risk  assessment was considered, the ecological risk assessment
process should build on the information already developed for the site.

       It is important to realize that this eight-step approach is not a simple linear or
sequential process. The order of actions taken  will depend upon the stage of the RI/FS at
which the site is currently, the  amount and types of site information  available, as well as
other factors.  The process can be iterative, and in some iterations, certain individual steps
might not be needed. In many cases, it might  be appropriate and desirable to conduct several
steps concurrently.

       Tasks that should be accomplished  in each of the eight steps  in Exhibits 1-2 and 1-3
are described in the eight following  sections. The eight sections include example boxes based
on the three hypothetical Superfund  sites in Appendix A as well as exhibits and highlight
boxes.
                                                                  INTRODUCTION, Page 13

-------
August 21.  1996
                                                                                       DRAT
                                                             EXHIBIT 1-5
                                      Ecological Risk Assessment  in the RI/FS Process
               SCHttNINCi
            ECOLOGICAL RISK
              ASSESSMENT

              (SIfcPS I » 2)
                HH06LEU
            FORMULATION AND
              STUDY DESIGN

               (SltPS 3 i 4)
                                             Remedial Invesligalion
                                    Feasibility Study
                                             WP
                                             and
                                             SAP
                  Site
              Invesligalion
   Establish     Development
   Remedial     and Analysis
   Objectives    ol Alternatives
   Htll)
VtHlf ICA1ION
  (SltP i|
   Relini
iem*dial
battd on ink
                                                                                                      10
                                         Remedy S*Uclion
                                         Rccoid at Dccitiun
                                         R*m*dnl Octign
                                                l Action
Conduct iitk
• •ilualion ol
 (•medial
 *U(in>live>
                         ANALYSIS Of
                    EXPOSURE and EFFECTS
                    RISK CHARACIEHIZAIIUN
Ecological Uoniloimg
INTRODUCTION. Page 14

-------
August 21.  1996                                                            DRAFT
Framework for Ecological Risk Assessment (1992a)  xi
U.S. EPA's (1989b) Risk Assessment Guidance for Superfund, Volume 2:
      Environmental Evaluation Manual xii
Framework for Ecological Risk Assessment (1992a)  1-1
U.S. EPA, 1989a, 199la,b 1-2
U.S. EPA, 1989b 1-2
ECO Update senes (U.S. EPA, L996a, I995b, 1994b,c,d,e, I992b.c,d, 1991c,d  1-2
Framework for Ecological Risk Assessment (U.S. EPA, 1992a  1-2
U.S. EPA, 1992a 1-3
NRC, 1983 1-4
NRC, 1993 1-4
U.S. EPA, 1992a 1-4
U.S. EPA, 1992a 1-4
U.S. EPA, 1992a 1-5
U.S. EPA, 1992a 1-6
U.S. EPA, 1992a 1-6
U.S. EPA, 1994a, 1995b  1-7
U.S. EPA's (1994a) Edge-water Consensus on an EPA Strategy for Ecosystem
      Protection 1-7
ECO Update Volume 1, Number 3 (U.S. EPA,  1992c 1-8
                                                          INTRODUCTION, Page 15

-------
August 21. 1996  	                                        DRAFT

        STEP 1:  SCREENING-LEVEL PROBLEM FORMULATION
                AND ECOLOGICAL EFFECTS EVALUATION
                                   OVERVIEW

         The screening-level problem formulation and ecological effects evaluation is
   pan of the initial ecological risk screening assessment.  For this initial step, it is likely
   that site-specific information for determining the nature and extent of contamination
   and for characterizing ecological receptors at the site is limited. This step includes all
   the functions of problem formulation (more fully described in Steps  3 and 4) and
   ecological effects analysis, but on a screening level. The results of this step will be
   used in conjunction with exposure estimates in the preliminary risk calculation in
   Step 2.
1.1   INTRODUCTION

      Step 1  is the screening-level problem formulation process and ecological effects
evaluation (Highlight Box l-l defines screening-level risk assessments).  Consultation with
the BTAG is recommended at this stage. How to brief the BTAG on the setting, history, and
ecology of a site is described in ECO Update Volume 1, Number 5 (U.S. EPA, 1992d).
Section 1.2 describes the screening-level problem formulation, and Section  1.3 describes the
screening-level ecological effects evaluation.  Section 1.4 summarizes this step.
1.2   SCREENING-LEVEL PROBLEM FORMULATION

      The screening-level problem formulation focuses on five issues:

     (1)  Environmental setting and contaminants known or suspected to exist at the site
          (Section 1.2.1);

     (2)  Contaminant fate and transport mechanisms that might exist at the site (Section
          1.2.2);

     (3)  The mechanisms of ecotoxicity associated with contaminants and likely categories
          of receptors that could be affected (Section 1.2.3);

                                                                     STEP 1. Page 1

-------
August 21. 1996
                                     DRAFT
      (4)   What complete exposure
           pathways ought exist at the site
           
-------
 August 21. 1996         	  	                DRAFT

       •      Has contamination migrated from source areas and resulted in 'off-site"
              impacts or the threat of impacts, in addition to on-site threats or impacts?

       These questions should be answered using the site reports, maps (e.g, U.S. Geological
 Survey, National Wetlands Inventory), available aerial photographs, communication with
 appropriate agencies (e.g., U.S. Fish and Wildlife  Service,  National Oceanic and Atmospheric
 Administration, State Natural  Heritage Programs), and a site visit.  Activities that should be
 conducted during  this site visit include:

       •      Note the layout and topography of the site.

       •      Note and describe any water bodies and wetlands.

       •*     Identify and map evidence indicating contamination or potential contamination
              (e.g., areas of no vegetation, runoff gullies to surface waters).

       •      Describe existing aquatic, terrestrial, and wetland ecological habitat types (e.g.,
              forest, old field), and estimate  the area covered by these habitats.

       •      Note any potentially sensitive environments (see Section 1.2.3 for examples of
              sensitive environments).

       •      Describe  and, if possible, map  soil and  water types, land uses, and the
              dominant vegetation species present.

       •      Record any observations of animal species or sign of a  species.

       Mapping can be useful in establishing a "picture" of the site  to assist in  problem
formulation.  The  completed checklist (U.S. EPA,  1996c) will provide information regarding
habitats and species potentially or a»rtually present on  site, potential contaminant migration
pathways, exposure pathways, and the potential for non-chemical stresses at the site.

       After finishing the checklist, it might  be possible to determine  that present or future
ecological  impacts are negligible because complete exposure pathways do not exist and could
not exist in the future.  Many  Superfund sites are  located in highly industrialized  areas where
there could be few if any ecological receptors or where site-related impacts might be
indistinguishable from non-site-related impacts (see Highlight Box 1-2).  For such sites,
remediation to reduce ecological risks might  not be needed. However, all sites should be
evaluated by qualified personnel to determine whether this conclusion is appropriate.
                                                                           STEP 1, Page 3

-------
A'ue-ust 21. 1996
                                                                                  DRAFT
         HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-2
     Industrial or Urban Settings

         Many hazardous waste sites exist
  m currently or historically industrialized
  or urbanized areas.  In these instances, it
  can be difficult to distinguish between
  impacts related to contaminants from  a
  particular site and impacts related to
  non-contaminant stressors or to
  contaminants from other sites.  However,
  even in these cases, it could be
  appropriate  to take some remedial
  actions based on ecological nsks.  These
  actions might  be limited to source
  removal or  might be more extensive.
  An ecological risk assessment can assist
  the nsk manager in  determining what
  action, if any. is appropriate.
                                                  Other Superfund sites are located in less
                                           disturbed areas with protected or sensitive
                                           environments that could be at nsk of adverse
                                           effects from contaminants from the site. State
                                           and federal laws  (e.g., the Clean. Water Act, the
                                           Endangered Species Act) designate certain types
                                           of environments as requiring protection. Other
                                           types  of habitats unique to certain areas also
                                           could need special consideration in the nsk
                                           assessment (see Section 1.2.3).

                                           1.2.2  Contaminant Fate and Transport

                                                  During problem formulation, pathways
                                           for migration of a contaminant (e.g., windblown
                                           dust, surface water runoff, erosion) should  be
                                           identified. These pathways can exhibit a
                                           decreasing gradient of contamination with
                                           increasing distance from a site.  There are
                                           exceptions, however, because physical and
                                           chemical  charactenstics of the media also
influence contaminant distribution (e.g., the pattern of contaminated sediment deposition in
streams vanes depending on stream flow  and bottom characteristics). For the screening-level
risk assessment, the highest contaminant concentrations measured on the site should be
documented for each medium.

1.2.3  Ecotoxicity and Potential Receptors

       Understanding  the toxac  mechanism of a contaminant helps to evaluate the importance
of potential exposure pathways  (see Section  1.2.4) and to focus  the  selection of assessment
endpoints (see Section  1.2,5).  Some contaminants, for example, affect pnmarily vertebrate
animals by  interfering with organ systems not found in  invertebrates or plants  (e.g.,  distal
tubules of vertebrate kidneys, vertebrate  hormone systems).  Other substances might affect
primarily certain insect groups (e.g., by interfenng  with hormones needed for metamorphosis),
plants  (e.g., some herbicides), or other groups of organisms. For substances that affect, for
example, reproduction of mammals at much  lower environmental' exposure  levels than they
affect oiher groups  of organisms, the screening-level risk assessment can initially focus on
exposure pathways  and nsks  to mammals. Example Box 1-1 illustrates this point using the
PCB site example provided in Appendix  A.  A  review of some  of the more recent ecological
risk and toxiciry assessment literature can help  identify likely effects of the more common
contaminants at Superfund sites.
STEP 1. Page 4

-------
August 21. 1996                                                                   DRAFT
                                  EXAMPLE BOX 1-1
                                 Ecotoxicity-PCB Site

          Some PCBs are reproductive toxins in mammals. When ingested, they induce (i.e.,
   increase concentrations and activity of) enzymes in  the liver (Melancon and Lech, 1983). The
   enzymes are not specific for PCBs and will enhance the degradation of steroid hormones
   (Peakall, 1975).  The observed impairment of reproduction in mammals exposed to PCBs might
   be caused by PCB-induced reduction in circulating steroid hormones (Tanabe, 1988).  Other
   effects, such as liver pathology, are also evident at high exposure levels (Fuller and Hobson,
   1986).  Given this information, the screening ecological risk assessment should include potential
   exposure pathways for mammals to PCBs (see Example Box 1-2).
       An experienced biologist or ecologist can determine what plants, animals, and habitats
exist or can be expected to exist in the area of the Superfund site.  Exhibit  1-1, adapted from
the Superfund Hazard Ranking System, is a partial list of types of sensitive environments that
could require protection or special consideration.  Information obtained for the environmental
checklist (Section 1.2.1), existing information  and maps,  and  aerial photographs should be
used to identify the presence of sensitive environments on or near a site that might be
threatened by contaminants from the site.

1.2.4  Complete Exposure Pathways

       Evaluating potential exposure pathways is one of  the primary tasks of the screening-
level ecological characterization of the site.  For an exposure pathway to be complete, a
contaminant must be able to travel from the source to ecological receptors and to be taken up
by the receptors via one or more exposure routes.  (Highlight Box I-3 defines exposure
pathway and exposure  route.)  Identifying complete exposure pathways prior to a quantitative
evaluation of toxicity allows the assessment to focus on only those contaminants that can
reach ecological receptors.

       Different exposure routes are important for different groups of organisms. For
terrestrial animals, three basic exposure routes need to be evaluated: inhalation, ingestion,
ancl dermal absorption.  For terrestrial plants,  root absorption of contaminants  in soils or leaf
absorption of contaminants evaporating from the soil are of concern at Superfund sites.  For
aquatic animals, direct contact (of water or sediment with the gills or dermis)  and ingestion of
food (and sometimes sediments) should be considered.  For aquauc plants,  direct contact with
water, and sometimes with air or sediments, is of primary concern.
                                                                           STEP I, Page 5

-------
Aumist  2!.  1996                                                                                DRAFT
                                             EXHIBIT 1-1
             List of  Sensitive Environments in the Hazard Ranking System*


     CnucaJ  habitat for FederaJ designated endangered or threatened species
     Marine Sanctuary
     NationaJ Park
     Designated FederaJ Wilderness Area
     .Areas identified under the Coastal Zone Management Act
     Sensiuve areas identified under the  National Estuary Program or Near  CoasiaJ Waters Program
     CnucaJ  areas identified under  the Clean Lakes Program
     NationaJ Monument
     National Seashore  Recreational Area
     NationaJ Lakeshore Recreational Area
     Habitat known  to be used by FederaJ designated or proposed endangered or threatened species
     NationaJ Preserve
     NauonaJ or State Wildlife Refuge
     Unit of CoastaJ Barrier Resources System
     CoastaJ Barrier (undeveloped)
     FederaJ land designated for protection of natural ecosystems
     Administratively Proposed FederaJ Wilderness Area
     Spawning areas critical for the maintenance of fish/shellfish species within  nver, lake, or
             coastaJ tidaJ waters
     Migratory  pathways  and feeding areas  cnucaJ for maintenance of anadromous fish species within nver
             reaches or areas in lakes or  coastaJ  tidaJ waters in which the fish spend extended periods of time
     Terrestrial areas utilized for breeding by large or dense aggregations of animals
     National nver reach "designated as RecreationaJ
     Habitat known  to be used by state designated endangered or threatened species
     Habitat known  to be used by species under  review as to its Federal endangered or threatened status
     CoastaJ Bamer (partially developed)
     FederaJ designated Scenic or Wild River
     State land  designated for wildlife or game management
     State-designated Scenic or Wild River
     State-designated NamnJ  Areas
     Particular areas, relatively small in size, important to maintenance  of unique bioQc communities
     State-designated areas for protection or maintenance of aquanc life
     Wedands6

             *  The  categories UT listed  in groups from  those assigned  higher factor values to those  assigned
     lower factor values in the Hazard Ranking Svsiem iHRS) for listing hazardous waste sues on Lhe  National
     Pnonues List (U.S.  EPA,  1990b).  See Federal Register.  Vol. 55, pp. 51624 and  51648  for additional
     information regirding definition!.
               Under the  HRS, wetlands ire rated separately from the  sensitive environments on the basis of
     size.  See  Federal Register. Vol. 55, pp. 51615  and 51662 for additional information.
STEP  1, Page 6

-------
August 21. 1996
                                   DRAFT
       The most likely exposure pathways and exposure routes also are related to the physical
and chemical properties of the contaminant (e.g., whether or not the contaminant is bound to
a matnx. such as organic carbon).  Of the basic exposure routes identified above, more
information generally is available to  quantify exposure levels for ingesuon by terrestrial
animals, and for direct contact with water or sediments by aquatic organisms, than for other
exposure routes  and receptors.  Although other exposure routes can be important, more
assumptions are  needed to estimate exposure levels for those routes, and the results are less
certain.  Professional judgment is needed to determine if evaluating those routes sufficiently
improves a risk assessment to warrant the effort
       If an exposure pathway is not
complete for a specific contaminant (i.e.,
ecological receptors cannot be exposed to
the contaminant), that exposure pathway
does not need to be evaluated further.  For
example, suppose a contaminant that impairs
reproduction in mammals occurs well below
the root  zone of plants that occur or are
expected to  occur on a site.  Herbivorous
mammals would not be exposed to the
contaminant through their diets because
plants would not be contaminated.
Assuming that most soil  macroinvertebrates
available for ingestion live in the root zone,
insectivorous mammals also would be
unlikely  to be exposed.  Burrowing
mammals would not be expected to come
into direct contact with the contaminated
soils.  In this case, a complete exposure
route for this contaminant for surface-dwelling mammals would not exist, and the
contaminant would not pose a significant nsk to this group of organisms. Secondary
questions might include whether the contaminant is  leaching from the soil to ground water
that discharges to surface water, thereby posing a risk to the aquatic environment or to
terrestrial mammals that  drink the water or consume aquatic  prey. Example Box 1-2
illustrates the process of  identifying complete exposure pathways based on the PCB site
described in Appendix A.

1.2.5  Assessment and Measurement Endpoints

       For the screening-level ecological risk assessment,  assessment endpoints  are any
adverse effects on ecological receptors, where receptors are plant and animal populations and
        HIGHUGHT BOX 1-3
       Exposure Pathway and
           Exposure Route

Exposure Pathway: The pathway by
which a contaminant travels from a source
(e.g., drums, contaminated soils) to
receptors. A pathway can involve multiple
media (e.g.,  soil runoff to surface waters  and
sedimentation, or volatilization to the
atmosphere).

Exposure Route:  A point of contact/entry
of a contaminant from the environment into
an organism (e.g., inhalation, ingestion,
dermal absorption).
                                                                           STEP 1, Page?

-------
August 2!  1996         	             	DRAFT
                                  EXAMPLE BOX 1-2
               Complete Exposure Pathways for Mammals-PCB Site

          Three possible exposure pathways for mammals were evaluated at the PCB Site:
   inhalation, mgestion through the food chain, and incidental soil/sediment ingestion.

          Inhalation.  PCBs are not highly volatile, so the inhalation of PCBs by mammals
   would be an essentially incomplete exposure pathway.

          Ingestion through the food chain.  PCBs tend to bioaccumulate and biomagnify in
   food chains.  PCBs in soils generally are not taken up by most plants, but are accumulated by
   soil macromvertebrates. Thus, mammalian herbivores would not be exposed to  PCBs in most of
   their diet.  In contrast, mammalian insectivores,  such as shrews, could be exposed to PCBs in
   most of their diet.  For PCBs, the ingestion route for mammals would be essentially incomplete
   for herbivores but complete for insectivores. For the PCB site, therefore, the ingestion exposure
   route for a mammalian insectivore (e.g., shrew)  would be a complete exposure pathway that
   should be evaluated.

          Incidental soil/sediment ingestion.  Mammals can ingest some quantity of soils or
   sediments incidentally, as they groom their fur or consume plants or animals from the soil.
   Burrowing mammals  are likely to ingest greater  quantities of soils during grooming than non-
   burrowing mammals,  and mammals that consume plant roots or soil-dwelling macroinvertebrates
   are likely to ingest greater quantities of soils than mammals that consume other  foods.  The
   intake of PCBs from  incidental ingestion of PCB-contaminated soils is difficult to  estimate, but
   for mammalian insectivores, it is likely to  be far less than the intake of PCBs in the diet.  For
   herbivores, the incidental intake of PCBs in soils might be higher than the intake of PCBs in
   their diet, but sull less than the intake of PCBs by mammals feeding on  soil  macroinvertebrates.
   Thus, the exposure pathway for mammalian msecdvores remains the exposure pathway that
   should be evaluated.
communities, habitats,  and sensitive environments.  Adverse effects  on populations can be
inferred from measures related to unpaired reproduction, growth, and survival.  Adverse
effects on communiues can be inferred from changes in commuiury  structure or function.
Adverse effects on habitats can be inferred from changes  in composition and characteristics
that reduce the habitats' ability to support the plant and animal populations and comrnumues.

       Many of the screening ecotoxiciry values now available or likely to be available in  the
future  for the Superfund program (see Section  1.3) are based on  generic assessment endpoints
(e.g., protection of aquatic communities from changes in structure or function)  and are
assumed to be widely  applicable to sites around the United States.
STEP 1, Page 8

-------
 August 21. 1996
                                    DRAFT
 1.3   SCREENING-LEVEL ECOLOGICAL EFFECTS EVALUATION

       The next step in the screening-level nsk assessment is the preliminary ecological
 effects evaluation and the establishment of contaminant exposure levels that represent
 conservative thresholds  for adverse ecological effects.  In this guidance, those conservative
 thresholds are called screening ecotoxicity values.  Physical stresses  unrelated to contaminants
 at the site are not the focus of the  risk assessment  (see Highlight Box 1-4) (although they can
 be considered later when evaluating effects of remedial alternatives).
       A literature search for studies that
quantify toxicity (i.e., exposure-response) is
necessary to evaluate the likelihood of toxic
effects in different groups of organisms.
Appendix C provides a basic introduction to
conducting  a literature search, but an expert
should be consulted to minimize time and
costs.  The  toxicity profile should describe
the toxic mechanisms of action  for the
exposure routes being evaluated and the
dose or environmental concentration that
causes a specified adverse effect.

       For each complete exposure
pathway/route and contaminant, an
screening ecotoxicity value should be
developed.  The U.S. EPA Office of
Emergency  and Remedial Response has
developed screening ecotoxicity values
(called ecotox thresholds) specifically  for
this nsk assessment guidance (U.S.  EPA,
1996a). These values are for surface waters
and sediments and are based on direct
exposure routes only.  Bioaccumulation and
biomagnification in food chains have not been accounted for.  When screening ecotoxicity
values are not available, they should be developed from other sources.1  The following
         HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-4
      Non-Chemical Stressors

       Ecosystems can be stressed by
physical,  as well as by chemical, alterations
of their environment. For this reason,
EPA's (1992a) Framework for Ecological
Risk Assessment addresses "stressor-
response" evaluation to include all types of
stress instead of "dose-response" or
"exposure-response" evaluation, which
implies that the stressor must be a toxic
substance.

       For Superfund sites, however,
CERCLA addresses risks from hazardous
substances released to the environment, not
risks from physical alterations of the
environment.  This guidance document,
therefore, focuses on exposure-response
evaluations for toxic substances.
    1 It is possible to conduct a screening risk assessment with limited information and conservative assumptions.
If site-specific information is too limited however, the nsk assessment is almost certain to move into Steps 3 through
7, which require field-collected data. The more complete the initial information, the better the decision that can be
made at this preliminary stage.
                                                                             STEP 1, Page 9

-------
August
1996
                                                                                   DRAFT
subsections describe preferred data sources (Section 1.3.1), dose conversions (Section 1.3.2),
and analyzing uncertainty in the values (Section 1.3.3).
1.3.1  Preferred Toxicity Data

       Screening ecotoxicity values should
represent a no-observed-adverse-effect-level
(NOAEL) for long-term (chronic) exposures
to a contaminant.  Ecological effects of most
concern are  those that can impact
populations  (or higher levels of biological
organization). These include adverse effects
on development, reproduction, and
survivorship.  Community-level effects also
can be of concern, but toxicity data on
community-level endpoints are limited  and
might be difficult to extrapolate from one
community to another.

       When reviewing  the literature, one
should be aware of the limitations of
published information in characterizing
actual or probable  hazards at a specific site.
U.S. EPA discourages reliance on secondary
references because study details relevant  for
determining  the applicability of findings to a
given site usually are not reported in
secondary sources.  Only primary literature
that  has been carefully reviewed by an
ecotoxicologist should be used to support a
decision.  Several considerations and data
preferences  are summarized in Highlight Box
I-5 and described  more  fully below.
                                             HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-5
                                         Data Hierarchy for Deriving
                                        Screening Ecotoxicity Values

                                            To develop a chronic NOAEL for a
                                     screening ecotoxicity value from existing
                                     literature, the following data hierarchy
                                     minimizes extrapolations and uncertainties
                                     in the value:

                                      •     A NOAEL is preferred to a
                                            LOAEL, which  is preferred to an
                                            LCjQ or an EC^.

                                      •     Long-term (chronic) studies are
                                            preferred to medium-term
                                            (subchromc)  studies, which are
                                            preferred to short-term (acute)
                                            studies.

                                       •     If exposure at the site is by
                                            ingesuon, dietary studies  are
                                            preferred to gavage  studies, which
                                            are preferred to non-ingestion routes
                                            of exposure.  Similarly, if exposure
                                            at the site is  dermal, dermal studies
                                            are preferred to  studies using other
                                            exposure routes.
       NOAELS and LOAELS  For each contaminant for which a complete exposure
pathway/route exists,  the literature should be reviewed for the lowest exposure level (e.g.,
concentration in water or in the diet, ingested dose) shown to produce adverse effects (e.g.,
reduced growth, impaired reproduction, increased mortality) in a potential receptor species.
This vaiue is called a lowest-observed-adverse-effect-level or LOAEL.  For those
contaminants with documented adverse effects, one also should identity the highest exposure
level  that is a NOAEL. A NOAEL is more appropriate than a LOAEL to use as an screening
ecotoxicity value to ensure that nsk is not underestimated (see Highlight Box 1-6).  However,
 STEP 1, Page 10

-------
 August 21, 1996
                                    DRAFT
 NOAELs currently are not available for
 many groups of organisms or many
 chemicals.  When a LOAEL value, but not a
 NOAEL value, is available from the
 literature, a standard  practice is to multiply
 the LOAEL by 0.1 and to use  the product as
 the screening ecotoxicity  value.  Support  for
 this practice comes from  a data review
 indicating that 96 percent of chemicals
 included in the review had LOAEL/NOAEL
 ratios of five or less, and that all were ten
 or less (Dourson and Stara, 1983).

       Exposure duration.   Data from
 studies of chronic exposure are preferable to
 data from medium-term (subchronic), short-
 term (acute), or single-exposure studies
 because exposures at Superfund remedial
 sites  usually are long-term.  Literature
 reviews by McNamara (1971) and Weil and
 McCollister (1963) indicate that chronic
 NOAELs can be lower than subchronic (90-
 day duration for rats) NOAELs by up to a factor
         HIGHLIGHT BOX 1-6
     NOAEL Preferred to LOAEL

        Because the NOAEL and LOAEL
 are identified by the hypothesis testing (i.e.,
 by comparing the response level of a test
 group to the response  level of a control
 group for a statistically significant
 difference), the actual  proportion of the test
 animals showing the adverse  response at an
 identified LOAEL depends on sample size,
 variability of the response, and the dose
 interval.  LOAELs can represent a 30
 percent or higher effect level  for the
 minimum sample sizes recommended for
 standard test protocols. For this reason,
 EPA recommends that NOAELs. instead of
 LOAELs, are used to determine a screening
 exposure level that is unlikely to adversely
 impact populations.
of ten.2
       Exposure route.  The exposure route used in the toxiciry study should be
comparable to the exposure route in the risk assessment.  For example, data from studies
where exposure is by gavage generally are not preferred for estimating dietary concentrations
that could produce adverse effects,  because the rate at which the substance is absorbed from
the gastrointestinal tract usually is greater following gavage than following dietary
administration.  Similarly, intravenous injection of a substance results in "instantaneous
absorption"  and does not allow the  substance  to first pass through  the liver, as it would
    2  The literature reviews of McNamara (1976) and Wed and McColuSter (1963) included both rodent
and non-rodent species.  The duration of the subchronic exposure usually was 90 days, but ranged from
30 to  210 days.  A wide variery of endpoints and criteria for  adverse effects were included in  these
reviews.  Despite this  variation in the original studies, their findings provide  a general indication of the
ratio between subchronic to chronic NOAELs for effects other than cancer and reproductive effects. For
some  chemicals, chronic dosing resulted in increased chemical tolerance.  For over 50 percent of the
compounds tested, the chronic NOAEL was  less than the 90-day  NOAEL by a factor of 2 or  less.
However, in a few cases, the chronic NOAEL  was up to a factor of 10 less than the subchronic NOAEL
(U.S.  EPA, 1993e).
                                                                           STEP 1, Page 11

-------
August 21.  !996	DRAFT

following dietary exposure.  If it is necessary to attempt to extrapolate toxicity test results
from one route of exposure to another, the extrapolation should be performed or reviewed by
a toxicoloeist experienced in route-to-route extrapolations  for the class of animals at  issue.

       Field versus laboratory.  Most toxicity studies evaluate effects of a single
contaminant on a single species under controlled laboratory conditions.  Results from these
studies might  not be directly applicable to the field, where organisms typically are exposed to •
more than one contaminant in environmental situations that are not comparable to a laboratory
setting and where  genetic composition of the population can be more heterogeneous than that
of organisms bred for laboratory use.  In addition, the bioavailabdity of a contaminant is
different at a site than in a laboratory toxicity test.  In a field situation, organisms also will  be
subject to other environmental variables, such as unusual weather conditions, infectious
diseases, and food shortages. These variables can have either positive or negative effects on
the organism's response to a toxic contaminant that only a site-specific field study would be
able to evaluate.  Moreover, single-species toxicity  tests seldom provide information regarding
toxicant-related changes in community interactions (e.g., behavioral changes in prey species
that make them more susceptible to predation).

1.3.2  Dose Conversions

       For  some data reported in the literature, conversions are necessary to allow the data to
be used for species other than those tested or for measures of exposure other than those
reported. Many  doses in laboratory studies are reported in terms of concentration in the  diet
(e.g., mg contarrunant/kg diet or ppm in the diet). Dietary concentrations can  be  converted to
dose (e.g., mg contaminant/kg body weight/day) for comparison with estimated contaminant
intake levels in the receptor species,

       Ingesuon rates and body  weights for a test species often are reported in a  toxicity
study or  can be obtained from other literature sources (e.g., U.S. EPA, I993a,b).  For
extrapolations between animal species  with different metabolic rates as well as dietary
composition,  consult U.S. EPA (1992e, 1996b).

1.3.3  Uncertainty Assessment

       Professional judgment is  needed to determine the uncertainty  associated with
information taken  from the literature and any extrapolations used  in developing an screening
ecotoxiciry value. The nsk assessor should be consistently conservative in selecting literature
values and  describe the  limitations of using those values in the context of a particular site.
Consideration of the study design, endpoints, and other factors are important in determining
the utility of  loxiciry data in the screening-level nsk assessment  All of these factors should
be addressed  in an  uncertainty analysis prior to  the screening-level nsk calculation.
STEP I, Page 12

-------
August 21.  1996                                                                   DRAFT

1.4    SUMMARY

       At the conclusion of the screening-level problem formulation and ecological effects
evaJuation, the following information should have been compiled:

       •      Environmental setting and contaminants known or suspected to exist at the site
              and the maximum concentrations present (for each medium);

       •      Contaminant fate and transport mechanisms that might exist at the site;

       •      The mechanisms of ecotoxicity associated with contaminants and likely
              categories of receptors that could be affected;

       • •     The complete exposure pathways that might exist at the site from contaminant
              sources to receptors that could be affected; and

       •      Screening ecotoxicity values equivalent to chronic N'OAELs based on
              conservative assumptions.

       For the screening-level ecological nsk assessment, assessment endpoints will include
any likely adverse ecological effects on receptors for which exposure pathways are complete,
as determined from the  information listed above.  Measurement endpoints will be based on
the available literature regarding mechanisms of toxicity and will be used to establish the
screening ecotoxicity values.  Those values will be used with estimated exposure levels to
screen for ecological risks, as described in Step 2.
                                                                          STEP 1, Page 13

-------
August 21. 1996   	                                           DRAFT

          STEP 2: SCREENING-LEVEL EXPOSURE ESTIMATE
                          AND  RISK CALCULATION
                                    OVERVIEW

         The screening-level exposure estimate and risk calculation comprise the second
   step in the ecological risk screening for a site.  Risk is estimated by comparing
   maximum documented  exposure levels with the ecotoxicity screening values from
   Step  1.  At the conclusion of Step 2, it will be decided that either: (1) the screening-
   level ecological risk assessment is adequate to determine that ecological threats are
   negligible; or (2)  the process should continue to a more detailed ecological risk
   assessment (steps 3 through 7).  If the process continues, the  screening-level
   assessment serves to identify exposure pathways and preliminary contaminants of
   concern  for the baseline risk assessment by eliminating those contaminants and
   exposure pathways that pose negligible risks.
2.1   INTRODUCTION

      This step includes estimating exposure levels and screening for ecological risks as the
last two phases of the screening-level ecological risk assessment.  The process concludes with
a Scientific/Management Decision Point (SMDP) at which it is determined that:  (1)
ecological threats are negligible; (2) the ecological risk assessment should continue to
determine whether a risk exists; or (3) impacts are likely and a more detailed ecological  risk
assessment, incorporating more site-specific information, is needed.

      Section 2.2 describes the screening-level exposure assessment, focusing on the
complete exposure pathways identified in Step 1.  Section 2.3 describes the risk calculation
process, including estimating a hazard quotient, documenting the uncertainties in the quotient,
and summarizing the overall confidence in the screening-level ecological risk assessment.
Section  2.4 describes the SMDP that concludes Step 2.


2.2   SCREENING-LEVEL EXPOSURE ESTIMATES

      To estimate exposures for the screening-level ecological risk calculation, on-site
contaminant levels and general information on the types of biological receptors that might be
exposed should be known from Step 1. Only complete exposure pathways should be

                                                                       STEP 2, Page 1

-------
AUZVJSI 21. 1996
                                    DRAFT
evaluated.  For these, the highest measured or estimated on-site contaminant concentration for
each environmental medium should be used to estimate exposures.  This should ensure that
potential ecological threats  are not be missed.

2.2.1  Exposure Parameters

       For parameters needed to estimate exposures for which sound site-specific information
is lacking or difficult to develop, conservative assumptions should be used at this screening
level.  Examples of conservative assumptions are listed  below and described in the  following
paragraphs:
  •    Area use factor - 100 percent (factor
       related to home range and population
       density, see Highlight Box 2-1);

  •    Bioavailabiliry - 100 percent;

  •    Life stage - most sensitive life stage;

  •    Body  weight and food ingestion rate
       - minimum body weight to
       maximum ingestion rate; and

  •    Dietary composition - 100 percent of
       diet consists of the most
       contaminated dietary component.

       Area  use factor.  For the
screening-level exposure estimate for
terrestrial animals, assume that the home range of one or more animals is entirely within the
contaminated area, and thus the animals are exposed 100 percent of the time.  This is a
conservative  assumption and, as an assumption, is only applicable to the  screening-level phase
of the  nsk assessment. Species- and site-specific home range information would be needed
later, in Step 6, to estimate more accurately the percentage of time in animal would use a
contaminated area.  Also evaluate the possibility that some species might actually focus their
activities  m contaminated areas of the site. For example,  if contamination has  reduced
emergent vegetation in a pond, the pond might be more heavily used for feeding by waterfowl
than uncontaminated ponds  with little open water.

       Bloavailabllity. For the screening-level exposure estimate, in the absence of site-
specific information, assume that the bioavailabiiity of contaminants at the site is 100 percent
For  example, at the screening-level, lead would be assumed to be  100 percent  bioavailable  to
         HIGHLIGHT BOX 2-1
           Area Use Factor

       An animal's area use factor can be
defined as the ratio of the area of
contamination (or the site area under
investigation) to its home range, breeding
range, or feeding/foraging range.  To ensure
that ecological risks are not underestimated,
the smallest reasonable area use factor
should be assumed. This allows the
maximum number of animals to be exposed
to site contaminants and makes it more
likely that "hot spots"  (i.e., areas of
unusually high contamination levels) will be
significant proportions of individual animal's
home ranges.
STEP 2, Page 2

-------
August :i. 1996	 	DRAFT

mammals. While some literature indicates that mammals absorb approximately  10 percent of
ingested lead, absorption efficiency can be higher, up to about 60 percent, because dietary
factors such as fasting, and calcium and phosphate content of the diet, can affect the
absorption rate (Friberg et al., 1986).   Because few species have  been tested for
bioavailability, and because Steps 3 through 6 provide an opportunity for this issue to be
addressed specifically, the most  conservative assumption is appropriate for this step.

       Life stage.  For the screening level assessment, assume that the most sensitive life
stages are present.  If an early life stage is the most sensitive, the population should be
assumed to include or to be in that life stage.  For vertebrate populations, it is likely  that most
of the population is not in the most sensitive life  stage most of the time.  However, for many
invertebrate species, the entire population can be  at an early stage of development during
certain seasons.

       Body  weight  and food ingestion rates.  Estimates  of body weight and food
ingestion rates of the receptor animals also should be  made conservatively to avoid
understating nsk, although uncertainties in these factors are far  less  than the uncertainties
associated with the environmental contaminant concentrations.  U.S. EPA's Wildlife Exposure
Factors Handbook (U.S. EPA, 1993a,b) is a good source or reference to sources  of this
information.

       Bioaccumulation.  Bioaccumulation values obtained from  a  literature search can be
used to estimate contaminant accumulation and food chain transfer at  a Superfund site at  the
screening stage (Steps  1 and 2).  Because many environmental factors influence the degree of
bioaccumulation, sometimes by several orders of  magnitude, the most conservative (i.e.,
highest) bioaccumulation factor reported in the literature should be used in the absence of
site-specific information.  Thus,  the most  conservative BCF values identified in the literature
almost always are used to estimate bioaccumulation in screening-level ecological nsk
assessment in  Step 1.

       Dietary composition.  For species that  feed on more  than one type  of  food, the
screening-level assumption should be  that the diet is composed  entirely of whichever type of
food is most contaminated.  For example, if some foods (e.g., insects) are likely  to be more
contaminated than other foods (e.g., seeds and fruits)  typical  in the  diet of a receptor species,
assume  that the receptor species feeds exclusively on  the more  contaminated type of food.
Again, EPA's Wildlife Exposure Factors Handbook (U.S. EPA,  1993a,b) is a good source or
reference  to sources of this information.

2.2.2  Uncertainty Assessment

       Professional judgment is  needed to determine  the uncertainty associated with
information taken from the literature  and any extrapolations used in developing  a parameter to

                                                                            STEP 2,  Page 3

-------
August 2!  1996	DRAFT

estimate exposures. All assumptions used to estimate exposures should be stated, including
some description of the --gree of bias possible in each.  Where literature  values are used, an
indication of the range of values that could be considered appropriate also should be
indicated.
2.3    SCREENING-LEVEL RISK CALCULATION

       A quantitative screening-level nsk can be estimated using the exposure estimates
developed according to Section 2.2 and the screening ecotoxicity values developed according
to Section 1.3.  For the screening-level nsk calculation, the hazard  quotient approach, which
compares point estimates of screening ecotoxicity values and exposure  values, is adequate to
estimate nsk.  As descnbed in Section 1.3, the screening ecotoxicity value should be
equivalent to a documented and/or best conservatively estimated chronic NOAEL.  Thus, for
each contaminant and environmental medium, the hazard quotient can be expressed as the
ratio of a potential exposure level to the NOAEL:
*

                          HQ -    Dose   or  HQ =    EEC
                                 NOAEL             NOAEL

where:

       HQ =        hazard quotient;

       Dose =       estimated contaminant intake at the site (e.g., mg contaminant/kg body
                    weight per day);

       EEC =       estimated environmental concentration at the  site (e.g., mg
                    contaminant/L water, mg contaminant/kg sod, mg contaminant/kg food);
                    and

       NOAEL =    no-observed-adverse-effects-level (in units that match the dose or EEC).

An HQ less than one (unity) indicates that the contaminant alone is unlikely to cause adverse
ecological effects.  If multiple contaminants of potential ecological concern exist at the site, it
might be appropnate to sum the HQs for  receptors that could be simultaneously exposed to
the contaminants that produce effects by the same toxic mechanism (U.S. EPA, 1986a).  The
sum of the HQs is called a hazard index iHT); 
-------
August 21.  1996
                                                                                 DRAFT
                                                       HIGHLIGHT BOX 2-2
                                                  Hazard Index (HI) Calculation

                                                  For contaminants that produce adverse
                                              effects by the same toxic mechanism:
                                              Hazard Index =
       EEC,/NOA£L,
       EECVNOAEL,
       EEC/NOAEL,*
quotient.  As certainty in the exposure
concentrations and the NOAEL increase,
there is greater confidence  in the predictive
value of the hazard quotient model, and
unity (HQ =  1) becomes a  pass/fail decision
point.

       The screening-level  risk calculation
is a conservative estimate to ensure that
potential ecological threats  are not
overlooked. The calculation is used to
document a decision about  whether or not
there is a negligible potential for ecological
impacts, based on the information available
at this stage.  If the potential for ecological
impacts exists, this calculation can be  used
to eliminate the negligible-risk combinations
of contaminants and exposure pathways
from further consideration.

       If the screening-level risk assessment
indicates that adverse  ecological effects are
possible at environmental concentrations
below  standard quantitation limits,  a "non
detect" based on those limits cannot be used
to support a 'no risk"  decision.  Instead, the
risk assessor and risk  manager should
request appropriate detection limits or  agree
to continue to Step 3 where exposure concentrations can be estimated from other information
(e.g., fate and transport model, estimated dilution or attenuation from the source or areas
where the contaminant was detected).
                                               where:
                                              EEC. =
                                              NOAELi =
estimated environmental
concentration for the 1th
contaminant; and


NOAEL for the i* contaminant
(expressed either as a dose or
environmental concentration).
                                              The EEC and the NOAEL are expressed in
                                              the same units and represent the same
                                              exposure period (e.g., chronic). Dose could
                                              substitute for EEC throughout provided the
                                              NOAEL is expressed as a dose.
2.4    SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION POINT (SMDP)

       At the end of Step 2, the risk assessor communicates the results of the preliminary
ecological nsk assessment to the nsk manager.  The risk manager needs to decide whether the
information available is adequate to make a nsk management decision, and could require
technical advice from the ecological risk assessment team to reach a decision.  There are only
three possible decisions at this point:
                                                                          STEP 2, Page 5

-------
August :i   1996	      DRAFT

       (1)     There is adequate information to conclude chat ecological risks are negligible
              and  therefore no need for remediation on the  basis of ecological  risk;

       11 \     The  information  is not adequate to make a decision at this point, and the
              ecological nsk assessment process wiil continue to Step 3; or

       (3)     The  information  indicates a potential  for adverse ecological effects, and a more
              thorough  assessment is warranted.

       Note that the SMDP made at the end of the screening-level nsk calculation will not
set a preliminary cleanup goal  Screening ecotoxiciry values are derived to avoid
underestimating nsk.  Requiring a cleanup based solely on these values would not be
technically defensible.

       The nsk manager should document both the decision and the basis  for it. If the risk
characterization supports the first decision (i.e., negligible risk), the ecological risk assessment
process ends here with appropriate documentation to support the decision.  The  documentation
should include all analyses  and references used in the assessment, including a discussion of
the uncertainties associated with the HQ and HI estimates.

       For assessments that proceed to  Step 3, the screening-level analysis in Step 2 can
indicate and justify  which contaminants and exposure pathways can be eliminated from
further assessment  because  they pose negligible risk.

       U.S. EPA must be confident that the SMDP made after completion of this calculation
will protect the ecological components  of the environment.  The  decision to continue beyond
the screening-level nsk calculation does not indicate whether remediation is necessary at the
site.  That decision  will  be  made in Step  8 of the process.
2.5    SUMMARY

       At the conclusion of the exposure estimate and screening-level nsk calculation step,
the following information should have been compiled:

       (1)    Exposure estimates based on conservative assumptions and maximum
             concentrations present; and

       (2)    Hazard quotients (or hazard indices) indicating winch, if any, contaminants and
             exposure pathways might pose ecological threats.
STEP 2, Page 6

-------
August 21. 1996                                      ,                              DRAFT

       Based on the results of the screening-level ecological risk calculation, the lead nsk
manager and lead nsk assessor will  determine whether or not contaminants from the site pose
an ecological threat.  If there are sufficient data to determine that ecological threats are
negligible, the ecological nsk assessment will be complete at this step with a finding of no
ecological nsk. If the data indicate  that there is (or might be) a nsk of adverse ecological
effects, the ecological  nsk assessment will continue.

       Conservative assumptions have been used for each step of the screening-level
ecological nsk assessment.  Therefore, requinng a cleanup based solely on this information
would not be technically defensible.  To end the  assessment at this stage, the conclusion of
negligible ecological risk must be adequately  documented and technically defensible.  A lack
of information on the toxicity of a contaminant or on complete exposure routes will result in
a decision to continue  with the ecological risk assessment process (Steps 3 through 7)-not a
decision to delay the ecological risk assessment until a later date when more information
might be available.
                                                                             STEP 2, Page 7

-------
August 21. 1996                                                                DRAFT

 STEP 3:  BASELINE RISK ASSESSMENT  PROBLEM FORMULATION
                                     OVERVIEW

         Step 3 of the eight-step process inmates the problem formulation phase of the
   baseline ecological nsk assessment.  Step 3 refines the screening-level problem
   formulation and expands on the ecological issues that are of concern at the particular
   site.  In  the screening-level assessment, conservative  assumptions were used where site-
   specific  information was lacking.  In Step 3, the results of the screening assessment
   and additional site-specific information are used to determine the scope and goais of
   the baseline ecological risk assessment.  Steps 3 through 7 are required only for sites
   for which the screening-level assessment indicated a  need for further ecological risk
   evaluation.

         Problem formulation at Step  3 includes several activities:

     •   Refining preliminary contaminants of ecological concern;
     •   Further characterizing ecological effects of contaminants;
     •   Reviewing  and refining contaminant fate and transport, complete  exposure
         pathways, and ecosystems potentially at risk;
     •   Selecting assessment endpoints; and
     •   Developing of a conceptual model with  working hypotheses or questions that
         the site investigation will address.

   At the conclusion  of Step 3, there is a SMDP, which consists of agreement on four
   items:  the assessment endpoints, the exposure pathways, the nsk questions, and a
   conceptual model  integrating these components. The products of Step 3 are used to
   select measurement endpoints and to develop the ecological nsk assessment work plan
   (WP) and sampling and analysis plan (SAP) for the site  in Step  4. Steps 3 and  4 are,
   effectively, the data quality objective (DQO) process for the baseline ecological nsk
   assessment.
3.1    THE PROBLEM FORMULATION PROCESS

       In Step 3, problem formulation establishes the goals, breadth, and focus of the baseline
ecological nsk assessment.  It also establishes the assessment endpoints, or specific ecological
values to be protected (U.S. EPA,  1992a). Through Step 3, the questions and issues that need

                                                                        STEP 3, Page 1

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

to be addressed in the baseline ecological nsk assessment are defined based on potentially
complete exposure pathways and ecologicaJ effects.  A conceptual model of the site is
developed that includes questions  about the assessment endpoints and the relationship between
exposure and effects.  Step 3 culminates in  an SMDP, which  is agreement between the nsk
manager and nsk assessor on the assessment endpoints, exposure  pathways, and questions as
portrayed ;n the conceptual model of the site.

       The conceptual model, which  is completed in Step 4, also  will describe the approach,
types of data, and analytical tools  to be used for the analysis phase of the ecological nsk
assessment (Step 6).  Those components of the conceptual  model  are formally descnbed in
the ecological nsk WP and SAP in Step 4 of this eight-step process.  If there is not
agreement among the nsk manager, nsk assessor, and the other professionals involved with
the ecological nsk assessment on the  initial  conceptual model developed in Step 3, the final
conceptual model and field study design developed in Step 4 might not  resolve the issues that
must be considered to manage nsks effectively.

       The complexity of questions developed during problem formulation does not depend
on the size  of a site or the magnitude of its  contamination.   Large areas of contamination can
provoke simple questions and, conversely, small sites with  numerous  contaminants can require
a complex senes of questions and  assessment points.  There is no  rule that can be applied to
gauge the effort needed for an ecological nsk assessment based on site size or number of
contaminants; each site should be evaluated individually.

       At the beginning of Step 3, some basic information  should exist  for the  site.  At a
minimum, information should be available from the site history, PA, SI, and Steps 1  and 2 of
this eight-step process.  For large or complex sites, information might be available from
earlier site investigations.

       It is important to  be as complete as  possible early in the process  so that Steps  3
through 8 need not be repeated.  Repeating  the  selection of assessment endpoints and/or  the
questions and hypotheses concerning  those  endpoints is appropnaie only if new information
indicating new threats becomes available.  The  SMDP process should prevent  having to  return
to the problem formulation step because of  changing opinions on the  questions being asked.
RepcLtion of Step 3 should not be confused with the intentional uer.ng  (or phasing) of
ecological site investigations at large  or complex  sites  (sec Highlight  Box 3-1).  The process
of problem formulation at complex sites  is  the same as at more simple sites, but the number,
complexity,  and/or level of resolution of the juesuons and  hypotheses can be greater at
complex sues.

       While problem formulation is  conceptually simple,  in practice it is generally a
complex and interactive  process.   Defining  the  ecological problems to be addressed during the
baseline nsk assessment involves identifying toxic mechanisms of the contaminants,

STEP 3, Page 2

-------
August 21. 1996
                                       DRAFT
characterizing potential receptors, and
estimating exposure and potential
ecological effects.  Problem formulation
also constitutes  the DQO process for the
baseline ecological risk assessment (U.S.
EPA, 1993d. "

       The remainder of this section
describes six activities to be conducted
prior to the SMDP for this  step:
refining  preliminary contaminants of
ecological concern (Section 3.2); a
literature search on the potential
ecological effects  of the contaminants
(Section 3.3); qualitative evaluation of
complete exposure pathways and
ecosystems potentially at risk (Section
3.4);  selecting assessment endpoints
(Section 3.5); and developing the
conceptual model  and establishing risk
questions (Section 3.6).
3.2    REFINEMENT OF
       PRELIMINARY
       CONTAMINANTS OF
       CONCERN
          HIGHLIGHT BOX 3-1
       Tiering an Ecological Risk
               Assessment

       The ecological nsk assessment at
Superfund sites is at least a two-tier process.
Steps 1 and 2 of this guidance serves as a first,
or screening, tier pnor to expending a larger
effort for a detailed, site-specific ecological risk
assessment. The baseline risk assessment serves
as a second tier.  More than one tier could be
needed in the  baseline nsk assessment for large
or complex sites where there  is a need to
sequentially test interdependent hypotheses
developed during problem formulation (i.e.,
evaluating the results of  one field assessment
before designing a subsequent field study based
on the results).

       While tienng can be an effective  way  of
to manage site investigations, multiple sampling
phases typically  require some resampling
matrices sampled during  earlier tiers and
increased field mobilization costs. Thus, in
some cases, a tiered ecological risk assessment
might cost more than a non-tiered assessment.
The benefits of tienng should be weighed
against the costs.
       The results of the screening-level
risk assessment (Steps 1 and 2) should
have indicated which contaminants found at the site can be eliminated from further
consideration  and which should be evaluated further.  It is important to realize that
contaminants  that might pose an ecological nsk can be different from those that might pose a
human health nsk because of differing exposure pathways, sensitivities,  and responses to
contaminants.

       The initial.list of contaminants investigated in  Steps 1 and 1 included  ail contaminants
identified or  suspected to be at the site. During Steps  I and 2, it is likely that several of the
contaminants  found at the site were eliminated from further assessment because the risk
screen indicated that they posed  a negligible ecological risk.  Because of the  conservative
assumptions  used during the nsk screen, some of the contaminants retained for Step 3 also
might pose negligible risk.  At this stage, the risk assessor should review the assumptions
                                                                            STEP 3, Page 3

-------
 August 21. 1996	DRAFT

 used (e.g., 100 percent bioavailability) against vaJues reported in the literature (e.g., only up
 to 60 percent for a particular contaminant), and consider how the HQs would change if more
 realistic conservative assumptions were used instead.  For those contaminants for which the
 HQs drop to near or below unity, the nsk  assessor and nsk manager should discuss and agree
 on which can be eliminated from further consideration at this time.

       Sometimes, new information becomes available that indicates the initial assumptions
 that screened some contaminants out in Step 2 are no longer valid (e.g., site contaminant
 levels are higher than originally reported, joint-action toxicity was not considered in the
 preliminary nsk calculation, etc.).  In this case, contaminants can be placed back on the list of
 contaminants to be investigated with that justification.

        Note that a contaminant should not be eliminated from the list of contaminants to be
 investigated only because toxicity information is lacking; instead, limited or missing toxicity
 information must be addressed using best professional judgment and discussed as an
 uncertain ry.
3.3    LITERATURE SEARCH ON KNOWN ECOLOGICAL EFFECTS

       The literature search conducted for the screening-level risk assessment (Steps 1  and 2)
should be expanded to obtain the information needed for the more detailed problem
formulation phase of the baseline ecological nsk assessment  If pre-developed screening
ecotoxicity  values (e.g., ecotox thresholds developed by the Superfund Program; U.S. EPA,
1996a) were applied in Steps 1 and 2, then the literature search might need to be expanded to
identify NOAELs, LOAELs, exposure-response functions, and the mechanisms of toxic
responses.   Appendix C presents  a discussion of some of the factors important in conducting a
 lerarurc search.  Several U.S. EPA publications (e.g., U.S. EPA,  1995a,e,g,h) provide  a
window to original  toxicity Literature  for contaminants often found at Superfund sites.
3.4    CONTAMINANT FATE AND TRANSPORT, ECOSYSTEMS POTENTIALLY AT
       RISK, AND COMPLETE EXPOSURE PATHWAYS

       A preliminary  identification of contaminant fate and transport, ecosystems potentially
at nsk, and complete  exposure pathways was conducted in the screening ecological nsk
assessment.  In Step 3, the  exposure pathways and the ecosystems associated with the
assessment endpoints  that were retained by the screening nsk assessment are evaluated in
more detail. This effort typically involves compiling  additional information on:

       (1)    The environmental fate and transport of the contaminants;
STEP 3, Page 4

-------
August 21. 1996
                                    DRAFT
       (2)    The ecological setting of the site (including habitat, potential receptors, etc.);
              and

       (3)    The magnitude and extent of contamination, including its spatiaJ and temporal
              variability.

       For individual contaminants, it is frequently possible  to reduce the number of exposure
pathways that need to be evaluated to one or a few "critical  exposure pathways"  which (1)
reflect maximum exposures of receptors within the ecosystem or (2) constitute exposure
pathways to ecological receptors sensitive  to the  contaminant.  The critical exposure pathways
influence the selection of assessment endpoints for a  particular site. If multiple critical
exposure pathways exist, they each should be evaluated because it is often difficult to predict
which pathways could be responsible for the greatest ecological risk.

3.4:1  Contaminant Fate and Transport

       Information on how the contaminants will or could be transported or transformed in
the environment physically, chemically, and  biologically is used to identify the exposure
pathways that rrught lead to significant ecological effects  (see Highlight Box 3-2).
Chemically, contaminants can undergo  several processes in the environment:
              Degradation3;
              Complexation;
              lonization;
              Precipitation; and/or
              Adsorption.
Physically, contaminants might move
through the environment by one. or more
means:
              Volatilization;
              Erosion;
              Deposition (contaminant
              sinks);
              Weathering of parent material
              with subsequent transport;
              anoVor
        HIGHUGHT BOX 3-2
 Environmental Fate and  Exposure

       If a contaminant in an aquatic
ecosystem  is highly lipophilic (i.e.,
essentially  insoluble in water), it is likely to
partition primarily into sediments and not
into the water column.  When sampling
sediments for contamination, characterizing
sediment grain-size and total organic carbon,
which can  influence contaminant
partitioning, is important in evaluating
ecological  exposure.
        The product might be more toxic or less toxic than the parent compound.
                                                                            STEP 3, Page 5

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

       •       Water transport:
                     in solution.
                     as suspended matenaJ in the water, and
                     bulk transport of solid material.

Several biological processes also affect contaminant fate and transport in the environment:

       •       Bioaccumulauon;
       •       Bi ode gradation;
       •       Biological transformation ;
       •       Food chain transfers; and/or
       •       Excretion.

       Additional information should be gathered on past as well as current mechanisms of
contaminant release from source  areas at the site. The mechanisms of release along with the
chemical and physical form of a  contaminant can affect its  fare, transport, and potential for
reaching  ecological  receptors.

       A contaminant flow  diagram (or exposure pathway diagram) comprises a large part of
the conceptual model, as illustrated in Section 3.6. A contaminant flow diagram originates at
the primary contaminant source(s) and identifies  primary release  mechanisms and contaminant
transport pathways.  The release  and  movement of the contaminants can create secondary
sources (e.g., contaminated  sediments in a river;  see Example Box 3-1), and even tertiary
sources.

       The above information is  used to evaluate:  (1) where the contaminants are likely to
partition  in the environment; and (2)  the bioavailability of the contaminant  (historically,
currently, or in the future).

3.4.2  Ecosystems  Potentially at Risk

       The ecosystems or habitats potentially at  nsk depend on the ecological setting of a
site.  An initial source of information on the ecological  setting of a site is the data collected
during the preliminary site visit and characterization (Step  1), including the site ecological
checklist (Appendix B).  The site description should provide answers  to several questions
including:

       •       What habitats (e.g., maple-beech hardwood  forest, early successional fields) are
              present17
        The product might be more toxjc or less IOKJC than the parent compound.


STEP 3, Pige 6

-------
August :i.  1996	                                                       DRAFT

       •      What types of water bodies are present, if any?
       •      Do any other habitats listed in Exhibit 1-1 exist on  or adjacent to the site?
                                   EXAMPLE BOX 3-1
                          Exposure Pathway Model-OOT Site

          An abandoned pesticide production facility had released DDT to soils through poor
   handling practices dunng its operation.  Due to erosion of contaminated soils, DDT migrated to
   stream sediments.  The contaminated sediments might affect benthic organisms through direct
   contact or ingestion.  Benthic organisms that have accumulated DDT can be consumed by fish.
   and fish that have accumulated DDT can be consumed by piscivorous birds.  This example
   illustrates how contaminant transport is traced  from a primary source to a secondary source and
   from there through a food chain to an exposure point that can affect an assessment endpoint.
       While all  available  information must be used, it is not cnucal that complete site
setting information be collected during thus phase of the risk assessment.  However, it  is
important that habitats at the site are not overlooked; hence, a site visit might be needed to
supplement the site visit conducted during the screening risk assessment.  If a habitat that is
actually present on the site is omitted during the problem formulation phase, this step could
need to be repeated later when the  habitat is found, resulting in delays and additional costs
for the nsk assessment.

        Available information on ecological effects of contaminants (see Section 3.3) can help
focus the  assessment  on specific ecological  resources that should be evaluated more
thorouanly, because some groups of organisms can be more sensiuve (more susceptible) than
others  to a particular  contaminant.  For example, a species or group of species could be
physiologically sensitive to a particular contaminant (e.g., the contaminant might interfere
with the species'  hormone systems); or, the species might not be able to metabolize and
detoxify the particular contaminant(s) (e.g., honey bees and grass  snnmp cannot effectively
biodegrade PAHs, whereas fish generally can).  Alternatively,  an already stressed population
(e.g., due to habitat degradation) could be particularly sensitive to  any  added stresses.

       Variation  in sensitivity  should not be confused with vanauon in exposure, which can
result from behavioral and dietary  differences among species.  For example, predators can be
exposed to higher levels of contaminants that biomagmfy in food chains than are herbivores.
A specialist predator could feed primarily on one prey type that is a primary receptor of the
contaminant.  Some species  might preferentially feed in a habitat where the contaminant tends
to accumulate. On the other hand, a species  might change its behavior to avoid contaminated

                                                                             STEP 3, Page 7

-------
August :i.  1996  	DRAFT

areas.  Both susceptibility to toxic effects of a contaminant and behaviors that affect exposure
levels can influence risks for particular groups of organisms.

3.4.3  Complete Exposure Pathways

       The potentially complete exposure pathways identified in Steps 1  and 2 are described
in more detail in Step 3 on the basis of the refined contaminant fate and  transport evaluations
(Section 3.3.1) and evaluation of potential ecological receptors (Section 3.3.2).

       Some of the potentially complete exposure pathways identified in  Steps  I  and 2  might
be ruled out from further consideration at this time.  Sometimes, additional exposure
pathways might be identified, particularly those originating from secondary sources.  Any data
gaps that result in questions about whether an exposure pathway is complete should be
identified, and the type of data needed to answer those questions should be described to assist
in developing the WP and SAP in Step 4.

       During Step 3, the potential for food-chain exposures deserves  particular attention.
Some contaminants are effectively transferred through food chains, while  others are  not.  To
illustrate this point, copper and DDT are compared in Example Box 3-2.
                                 EXAMPLE BOX 3-2
             Potential for Food Chain Transfer-Copper and DOT Sites

         Copper can be toxic in aquatic ecosystems or to terrestrial  plants.  However, it is an
   essential  nutnem for both plants  and animals, and organisms can regulate internal copper
   concentrations within limits.  For this reason, copper tends not to accumulate in most organisms
   or to biomagnify m food chains,  and thus tends not to reach levels high enough to cause
   adverse responses through  food chain transfer 10 upper-trophic-level organisms.  (Copper is
   known to accumulate by several  orders of magnitude  in phyxoplankton and in filter-feeding
   mollusks, however, and thus can pose  a threat to organisms that feed on these components of
   aquatic ecosystems; U.S. EPA, 1985a.) In contrast, DDT, a contaminant  that accumulates in
   fatty tissues, can biomagnify in many different types of food chains.  Upper-trophic-level
   species (such as predatory  birds), therefore, are likely to be exposed to higher levels of DDT
   through their prey than are lower-trophic-level species in the ecos;item.
3.5    SELECTION  OF ASSESSMENT ENDPOINTS

       \s noted in tie introduction to this guidance, an assessment endpoint is "an explicit
expression of the environmental value that is to be protected" (U.S. EPA, 1992a).  There is  an

STEP 3, Page 8

-------
August 21.  1996                                                                    DRAFT

important distinction between human health nsk assessment and ecological risk assessment.
In human health risk assessment, only one species is evaluated, and cancer and noncancer
systemic effects are the usual assessment endpoints.  Ecological nsk assessment, on the other
hand, involves multiple species that  are likely to be exposed to differing degrees and to
respond differently to the same contaminant.  Nonetheless, it is not practical or possible to
directly evaluate risks to all of the individual components of the ecosystem at a site.  Instead,
assessment endpoints focus the risk assessment on particular components of the ecosystem
that could be adversely  affected  by contaminants from the site.

       The selection of assessment endpoints includes discussion between the nsk assessor
and the nsk manager concerning management policy goals and ecological  values.  Input from
the regional BTAG, PRPs, and other stakeholders associated with a site at this stage can help
the risk assessor to identify ecological assessment endpoints that the risk manager can clearly
defend when making decisions for the site.  ECO Update Volume 3, Number 1, briefly
summarizes the process of selecting  assessment endpoints (U.S. EPA, 1995b).

       Individual assessment endpoints usually encompass a group of species or populations
with some common characteristics, such as a specific exposure route or contaminant
sensitivity.  Sometimes, individual assessment endpoints are limited to one species (e.g., a
species known to be particularly sensitive  to a site contaminant).  Assessment endpoints also
can encompass the typical structure and function of biological  communities or ecosystems
associated with a site.

       Assessment endpoints for the baseline ecological risk assessment must be selected
based on the ecosystems, communities, and/or species at  the site.  The selection of assessment
endpoints depends on:

       (1)     The contaminants  present and their concentrations;

       (2)     Mechanisms of toxicity  of the contaminants to different groups of organisms;

       (3)     Potential  sensitive or highly  exposed receptor groups present and attributes  of
              their natural history; and

       (4)     Potential  complete exposure pathways.

Thus, the process of selecting assessment  endpoints can be, and often is, iterative and
interactive  with other phases of problem formulation.

       The nsk assessor must "think through" the  contaminant mechanism(s) of ccotoxicity to
determine what receptors  will or could be at nsk.  This understanding must include how the
adverse effects of the contaminants might be expressed (e.g., eggshell thinning in birds), as

                                                                           STEP 3, Page 9

-------
 August :i.  1996	DRAFT

 well as how the chemical and physical form of the contaminants influence bioavailability and
 the type and magnitude of adverse response (e.g.,  inorganic versus organic mercury).

       The nsk assessor also should determine if the contaminants adversely affect organisms
 in direct contact with the contaminated media (i.e., direct exposure to water,  sediment, soil) or
 if the contaminants accumulate in food chains, resulting in adverse effects in organisms that
 are not directly exposed or are minimally exposed to the original contaminated media
 (indirect exposure).  The risk assessor should decide if the nsk assessment should focus on
 toxiciry resulting from direct or indirect exposures, or if both must be evaluated.

       Broad assessment endpomts (e.g., protecting aquatic communities) are generally of less
 value in problem formulation than specific assessment endpoints (e.g., maintaining aquatic
 community composition and structure downstream of a site similar to that upstream of the
 site).  Specific assessment endpoints  define the ecological value in sufficient detail to
 identify the measures needed to answer specific questions or to test specific hypotheses.
 Example Box 3-3 provides three examples of assessment endpomt selection based on the
 hypothetical sites in Appendix A.

       The formal  identification of assessment endpoints  is pan of the SMDP for this step.
 Regardless  of the level of effort to be expended on the subsequent phases of the nsk
 assessment, the assessment endpoints  identified are critical elements in the design of the
ecological nsk assessment and must be agreed upon as the focus of the risk assessment.
Once  assessment endpoints have been selected, testable hypotheses and measurement
endpoints can be developed to determine whether or not a potential threat to the assessment
endpoints exists. Testable hypotheses and measurement endpoints cannot be developed
without agreement  on the assessment endpoints among the risk manager, risk  assessor, and
other  involved professionals.


3.6    THE CONCEPTUAL MODEL AND TESTABLE HYPOTHESES

       The site conceptual model establishes the complete exposure pathways that will be
evaluated in the ecological nsk assessment and the  relationship of the measurement  endpoints
 to the assessment endpoints.  In the conceptual model, the possible exposure pathways
depicted in the exposure pathway diagram must be  linked directly to the assessment endpoints
 identified in Section  3.5.  Risk questions,  testable hypotheses, measurement endpoints, and the
 SAP are based on the conceptual model.  Developing the conceptual model and risk questions
 are descnbed in Sections 3.6.1  and 3.6.2, respectively. Selection  of measurement endpoints,
 completing the conceptual model,  is descnbed in Step 4.
STEP 3. Page  10

-------
August :i. 1996                                                                        DRAFT
                                     EXAMPLE BOX 3-3
                             Assessment Endpoint Selection
   DDT Site
          An assessment endpomt such as  protection of the ecosystem from the effects of DDT"
   would give little direction to the nsk assessment.  However, "protection of piscivorous birds
   from eggshell thinning due to DDT exposure" directs the nsk assessment toward the  food-chain
   transfer of DDT that results in eggshell thinning in a specific group of birds.  This assessment
   endpoint provides the foundation for identifying appropriate measures of effect and exposure
   and ultimately the design of the site investigation for the site.  It is not necessary that a specific
   piscivorous species of bird be identified on site. It is necessary that the exposure  pathway to a
   piscivorous bird exists and that the presence of a piscivorous bird could be expected.

   Copper Site

          Copper can be acutely or chronically  toxic to organisms in an aquatic community
   through direct exposure of the organisms to copper in the water and sediments.  Threats of
   copper to higher trophic  level organisms are unlikely to exceed threats to organisms at the base
   of the food chain, because copper is an essential nutrient which is effectively  regulated by most
   organisms  if the exposure is below immediately toxic levels.  Aquatic plants (particularly
   phytoplankton) and mollusks, however, are poor at regulating copper and might be sensitive
   receptors or effective in transferring copper to the next trophic level.  In addition,  fish fry can
   be very sensitive to eopper in water.  Based on these receptors and the potential for both acute
   and  chronic toxictty,  an appropriate general assessment endpoint for the system could be the
   maintenance of the pond community composition.  An operational definition of the assessment
   endpoint would  be pond  fish  and invertebrate community composition similar to that  of other
   ponds of similar size and characteristics in the area.

   PCS Site

         The primary ecological threat of PCBs in ecosystems is not through direct exposure and
   acute toxicity.  Instead, PCBs bioaccumulate  in food chains and can diminish reproductive
   s-ccess in  some vertebrate species. PCBs have been implicated as a cause of reduced
   reproductive success  of piscivorous birds (e.g., cormorants, terns) in the Great Lakes  (Colborn,
   1991) and  of mink along several waterways (Aulerich and Ringer, 1977; Foley et al.,  1988).
   Therefore,  reduced reproductive success in high-trophic-level species exposed via  their diet is a
   more appropriate assessment  endpoint  than either toxicity to organisms via direct exposure to
   PCBs in water, sediments, or soils, or  reproductive impairment in lower-trophic-level species.
                                                                               STEP 3, Page 11

-------
August 21.  1996           	DRAFT

3.6.1  Conceptual Model

       Based on the informauon  obtained from  Steps  1 and 2 of the ecological nsk
assessment process, knowledge of the contaminants present, the exposure pathway diagram,
and the assessment endpomts, an integrated conceptual model is  developed (see Example  Box
3-4).  The conceptual model includes a contaminant fate and transport diagram that traces the
contaminants'  movement from sources through the ecosystem to  receptors that include the
assessment endpomts (see Example Box 3-5V Contaminant exposure pathways that do not
lead to a species or group of species associated  with the proposed assessment endpomt
indicate that either:

       (1)    There is an incomplete exposure pathway to the receptors) associated  with  the
             proposed assessment endpomt: or

       (2)    There are missing components or  data necessary to demonstrate  a complete
             exposure pathway.
                                  EXAMPLE BOX 3-4
                   Description of the Conceptual Model-DDT Site

            One of the assessment endpoints selected for the  DDT site (Appendix A) is the
     protecuon of piscivorous birds.  The site conceptual model includes the release of DDT
     from the spill areas to the adjacent stream, followed by food chain accumulation of DDT
     from the sediments and  water through the lower trophic levels to forage fish in the stream.
     The forage fish are the exposure point for piscivorous birds.   Eggshell thinning was
     selected as the measure  of effect  During the literature review of the ecological effects of
     DDT. loxicity studies were found  that reported reduced reproductive success (i.e.,  number
     of young fledged) in birds that experienced eggshell thinning of 2C percent or more
     (Anderson  and Hickey,  1972; Dilworth et al., 1972).  Based  on those data, the nsk
     assessor and nsk manager agreed  that eggshell thinning of 20 percent or more would be
     considered an adverse effect for piscivorous  birds.

            Another effect of chronic  DDT exposure on some animals is to reduce their  ability
     to escape predanon. Thus, DDT can indirectly increase the  mortality rate of these
     organisms  by making them more susceptible to predators (Cooke, 1971; Krebs et al.,
     1974).  This effect of DDT on prey  also can have an indirect consequence for the
     predators.  If predators are more likely to capture the more contaminated prey, the
     predators could be exposed to DDT  at levels higher than represented in the avenge  prey
     population.
STEP 3, Page 12

-------
August 21. 1996
                                                           DRAI
                                                  EXAMPLE BOX 3-5
                                        Conceptual Model Diagram - DDT Site
                                                                     MEASUREMENT ENDPOINT
                                                                    (DDT concentration in fish tissue,
                                                                      exposure point for kingfisher)
                                                         SECONDARY RECEPTOR
                                                                  (Fish)
                                     IERIIARY RECEPIOR
                                          (Kingfisher)
       PRIMARY SOURCE
           (Plant site)
SECONDARY SOURCE
   (Surface drainage)   I
     TERTIARY SOURCE
(Stream sediments, exposure point
 for fish and macroinvertcbralcs)
  PRIMARY RECEI'IOR
(l)cnlhic macroinverlciuules.
   ex|iosurc point, fish)
                                                                         MEASUREMEN I ENDI'OIN I
                                                                          (Benlhic macroinvcrtebralc
                                                                             community structure)
                                                                                                         STEP 3. |»age I

-------
August II.  1996	DRAFT

If case (1)  is true, the proposed assessment endpoint should be Devaluated to determine  if it
is an appropriate endpoint for the sue.  If case (2) is true, then additional field data could be
needed to evaluate contaminant fate and transport at the site.  Failure to identify a complete
exposure pathway that does exist at the site can result in incorrect conclusions or in extra
time and effort being expended on  a supplementary  investigation to the ecological nsk
assessment.

       As  indicated in Section 3.5,  appropriate assessment endpomis differ  from site to site,
and can be at one or more levels of biological organization.  At any particular site, the
appropriate assessment endpomts might involve  local populations of a particular species,
community level integrity, and/or habitat  preservation. The site conceptual model must
encompass the level of biological organization appropriate for the assessment endpoints for
the  site.  The conceptual model can use assumptions that are generally representative of a
group of organisms or ecosystem components encompassed by the assessment endpoint in that
region of the country.

       The intent of the model is not to describe exactly a particular species or site as much
as it is to be  systematic, representative, and conservative where  information is lacking (with
assumptions biased to be more likely to overestimate than to underestimate  risk).  For
example, it is not necessary or even recommended to develop new test protocols to use
species that exist at a site to test the toxicity of site media.  Species used in standardized
laboratory toxicity tests  (e.g., fathead minnows, Hyallela amphipods) usually are adequate
surrogates for species in their  general taxa and habitat  at the site.

3.6.2  Risk  Questions

       Ecological risk hypotheses for Superfund sites basically arc questions about the
relationships  among assessment endpoints and their predicted responses  when exposed to
contaminants. The nsk questions should be based on the assessment endpoints (Step 3);
provide a basis for the development of the  study design (Step 4>; and provide  a  structure  for
evaluating  the results of the site investigation in the  analysis phase  Step 6) and during nsk
characterization  (Step 7).

       The most basic test hypothesis applicable to virtually all Superfund sites  is that site-
related contaminants are causing adverse effects (or could cause adverse effects  in  the future)
on the  assessment endpoints). To  use the baseline ecological  nsk assessment in the FS  to
evaluate remedial alternatives,  it is  helpful if the specific contaminant(s) responsible can  be
identified.  Thus refined, the question becomes "is chemical X is causing (or could cause)
adverse effects on the assessment endpoint0"  In general, there are four Lines of evidence that
can be used to  answer this question:
STEP 3. Page 14

-------
August li.  1996
                                   DRAFT
    (1)    Comparing estimated or measured
          exposure levels to chemical X
          with levels that are known from
          the literature  to be toxic to
          receptors associated with the
          assessment endpoints;

    (2)    Comparing laboratory bioassays
          with media from the site with
          boiassays with media from a
          reference site;

    (3)    Comparing in situ toxicity tests at
        v  the site with in situ toxicity tests
          in a reference body of water,
          and

    (4)    Comparing observed effects in
          the receptors  associated with the
          site with similar receptors at a
          reference site.
         HIGHLIGHT BOX 3-3
             Definitions:
      Null and Test Hypotheses

Null hypothesis:  Usually a hypothesis of
no differences between two populations
formulated for the express purpose of being
rejected.

Test-(or alternative) hypothesis: An
operational statement of the investigator's
research hypothesis.

       When appropriate, formal hypothesis
testing is preferred.  However, it might not
be practical for some assessment endpoints
or be the only  acceptable way to state
questions about those endpoints.
These lines of evidence are considered further in Step 4, as measurement endpoints are
selected and the site-specific study is designed.
3.7    SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION POINT (SMDP)

       At the conclusion of Step 3, there is a SMDP.  The SMDP consists of agreement on
four items:  the assessment endpoints, exposure pathways, conceptual model, and risk
questions.  Without agreement between the  nsk manager, risk assessor, and other involved
professionals on these items, measurement endpoints cannot be selected, and a site study
cannot be developed.

       These items can  be  summarized with the assistance of the diagram of the conceptual
model.  Example Box 3-5 shows the  conceptual model for the DDT site example in
Appendix A.
                                                                         STEP 3. Page 15

-------
 August 21. 1996	           DRAFT

 3.8    SUMMARY

       By combining information on:  (1) the  potential contaminants present; (2) the
 ecological setting; (3) environmental fate and transport; and (4) the ecotoxicity of the
 contaminants, an evaluation is made of what aspects of the ecosystem at the site could be at
 nsk and  what the adverse ecological response could^be.  "Critical exposure pathways" are
 based on:  (1) exposure pathways to sensitive species populations, or communities; and (2)
 exposure levels associated with predominant fate and transport mechanisms at a site.

       Based on that information, the nsk assessor and risk manager  agree on assessment
 endpoints and specific questions or testable hypotheses that, together  with the conceptual
 model, form the  basis for the site  investigation. At this stage, site-specific information on
 exposure pathways and/or the presence of specific species is likely to be incomplete.  By
 using the conceptual  model developed in  Step 3, measurement endpoints and a plan for filling
 information gaps can be developed and written into the ecological WP and SAP as described
 in Step 4.
STEP 3, Page  16

-------
August 21.  1996	_	DRAFT

               STEP 4:  STUDY DESIGN AND DATA QUALITY
                             OBJECTIVE PROCESS
                                     OVERVIEW

            The site conceptual model developed in Step 3, which includes exposure
     pathways, assessment endpomts, and questions or hypotheses, is used to develop
     measurement endpoints, the study design, and data quality objectives in this step.
     The products of Step 4 are the ecological risk assessment work plan (WP) and
     sampling and analysis plan (SAP), which describe the details of the site
     investigation as well as the data analysis methods and data quality objectives
     (DQOs). As part of the DQO process, the SAP specifies acceptable levels of
     decision errors that will be used as the basis for establishing the quantity and
     quality of data needed to support ecological risk management decisions.

            The lead risk assessor and the lead risk manager should agree that the WP
     and SAP describe a study that will provide the risk manager with the information
     needed to fulfill the requirements of the baseline risk assessment and to
     incorporate ecological considerations into the site remedial process. Once this
     step is completed, most of the professional judgment needed for the ecological
     risk assessment will have been incorporated into the design and details of the WP
     and SAP  This does not  limit the need for qualified professionals  in the
     implementation of the investigation, data acquisition, or data interpretation.
     However, there should be no  fundamental changes in goals or approach to the
     ecological risk assessment once the WP and SAP are finalized.

            It is important to coordinate this step with the WP and SAP for the site
     investigation, which is used to document the nature and extent of contamination
     and to evaluate human health risks.
       Step 4 of the ecological risk assessment establishes the measurement endpoints
(Section 4.1), study design (Section 4.2), and data quality objectives based on statistical
considerations (Section 4.3) for the site assessment that will accompany site-specific studies
for the remedial  investigation.  The site conceptual model developed in Step 3 is used to
identify which points or assumptions in the nsk assessment include the greatest degree of
conservatism or uncertainty.  The field sampling then can be designed to address the nsk
model parameters that have important effects on the risk estimates (e.g., bioavailability and
toxicity of contaminants in the field, contaminant concentrations at exposure points).
                                                                         STEP 4, Page 1

-------
August 2i. ;996	             DRAFT

       The products of Step 4 are the WP and SAP for the ecological component of the field
investigations < Section 4 4)   Involvement of the BTAG in the preparation, review, and
approval of WPs and SAPs  can help ensure  that the ecological nsk assessment is  well
focused, performed efficiently, and technically correct.

       The WP and SAP should specify the  site conceptual model developed in Step 3, and
the measurement endpomts  developed in  the beginning of Step 4.  The  WP describes:

       •     Assessment endpomts;
       •     Exposure pathways;
       •     Questions and testable hypotheses;
             The relationship of measurement endpomts to the assessment endpomts; and
       •     Uncertainties  and assumptions.

The SAP should describe:

       •     Data needs;
       •     Scientifically  valid  and sufficient  study design and data analysis procedures;
       •     Study methodology and protocols, including sampling techniques;
       •     Data reduction and interpretation techniques, including statistical analyses; and
       •     Quality assurance procedures and quality control techniques.

The SAP must include the data reduction and interpretation techniques,  because it  is necessary
to known how the data  will  be interpreted to specify the number of samples needed.

       Pnor to formal agreement  on  the WP and SAP, the proposed field sampling plan is
verified in Step 5.
4.1    ESTABLISHING MEASUREMENT ENDPOINTS

       As indicated m the Introduction, a measurement endpoint is defined as "a measurable
ecological characteristic  that is related  to the valued characteristic ;~osen  as the assessment
endpoint' iL'.S. EPA,  1992a) and is a measure of biological effects  e.g.,  mortality,
reproduction, growth).  Measurement endpomts arc frequently numerical expressions of
observations (e.g.,  toxicity test results,  community diversity measures) that can be compared
statistically to a control or reference site to detect adverse responses to a  site contaminant.
The relationship between measurement and assessment endpomts must be clearly described
within the conceptual  model and must  be based on scientific evidence.  This is critical
because the  assessment and measurement endpomts usually are  different endpomts (see the
Introduction).
STEP 4, Page 2

-------
August 21.  1996
                                                                                   DRAFT
                                                         Highlight Box 4-1
                                                    Importance  of Distinguishing
                                                  Measurement from Assessment
                                                             Endpoints

                                                      If a measurement endpoint is
                                               mistaken for an assessment endpoint, the
                                               misperception can anse that Superfund is
                                               basing a remediation on  an arbitrary or
                                               esoteric justification.  For example,
                                               protection of a few  invertebrate and algal
                                               species could be mistaken  as the basis for a
                                               remedial decision, when  the actual basis for
                                               the decision is the protection of the aquatic
                                               community as a whole (including higher-
                                               trophic-level game fish that depend on lower
                                               trophic levels in the community), as
                                               indicated by a few sensitive invertebrate and
                                               algal species.
       Typically, the number of
measurement endpoints that are potentially
appropriate for any given assessment
endpoint and circumstance  are limited.  The
most appropriate measurement endpoints for
an assessment endpoint depend on several
considerations, a primary one being how
many and  which lines of evidence are
needed to  support risk management
decisions at  the site (see Section 3.6.2).
The risk assessor must consider the utility of
each type of data, the  cost of collecting the
data, and the likely sensitivity of the risk
estimates to  the data.  Given the potential
ramifications of site actions, the site risk
manager might want to use more than one
line  of evidence to identify site-specific
thresholds for effects.

       There are some situations in which it
might only be necessary or possible to
compare estimated or measured contaminant exposure levels at a site to ecotoxicity values
derived from the literature.  For example, for contaminants in surface waters for which there
are state water quality standards, exceedance of the standards indicates that remediation to
reduce contaminant concentrations in surface  waters to below these levels couid be needed
whether impacts  are occurring or not.  For assessment endpoints for which impacts are
difficult to demonstrate in the field (e.g., because of high natural variability), and toxicity
tests are not  possible (e.g., food chain accumulation is involved), comparing environmental
concentrations with a well supported ecotoxicity value might have  to suffice.

       A toxicity test on contaminated medja from the site can suffice if the risk manager and
risk  assessor agree that laboratory toxicity tests with surrogate species  will be  taken as
indicative of likely effects on the  assessment  endpoint.  For sites with  complex mixtures of
contaminants without robust ecotoxicity values and high natural variability in potential
measures for the assessment endpoint, either laboratory  or in situ toxjcity testing might be the
best technique for evaluating risks to the assessment endpoint.  For inorganic substances in
soils or sediments, toxjcity  testing  often is needed to determine the degree to which a
contaminant  is bioavailable at a particular sue. Laboratory toxicity tests can indicate  the
potential for adverse impacts in the field, whale m situ toxicity testing  with resident organisms
can  provide  evidence of actual impacts occurring in the field.
                                                                            STEP 4, Page 3

-------
August I:  .9%	DRAFT

       Sometimes more than one line of evidence is needed to reasonably demonstrate that
contaminants from a site are likely  to cause adverse effects on the assessment endpoint. For
example, total recoverable copper in a surface water body could exceed aquatic ecotoxicity
values, but not cause adverse effects because the  copper is only partially bioavailablc or
because the ecocoxicity value is too conservauve  for the particular ecosystem.  Additional
evidence from bioassays or community surveys could help resolve whether the copper is
actually having adverse effects  (See Example Box 4-1).  Alternatively, if stream community
surveys indicate impairment of community structure downstream of a  site, comparing
contaminant  concentrations with aquatic toxiciry values can help identify which contaminants,
if any, are most likely to be causing the effect.  When some lines of evidence conflict with
others, professional judgment is needed to determine which data should be considered more
reliable or relevant to the questions.
                                  EXAMPLE BOX 4-1
                            Lines of Evidence-Copper Site

     Primary question:  Are ambient copper levels in sediments in the pond causing
           adverse effects in benthic organisms1

     Possible lines of evidence phrased as test hypotheses:

           (1)    Docs mortality in early life stages of benthic  aquatic insects in contact
                  with sediments from the site significantly exceed  (p < 0.05) mortality
                  in the same kinds of organisms in contact with sediments from a
                  reference site?

           (2)    Does mortality in m situ ioxicity  tests in sediments at the pond
                  significantly exceed (p < 0 05) mortality in in situ toxiciry tests in
                  sediments at a reference pond"1

           i 3)    .Are there significantly fewer (p <0.10) numbers  of benthic aquatic
                  insect species present per m* of sediment  at the pond near the seep
                  than at the opposite side of the pond?
       Once there is agreement on which lines of evidence are requ'red to answer questions
concerning ihe assessment endpoint,  the measurement endpoints by which the questions or
test hypotheses will be tested can be selected.
STEP 4, Page 4

-------
August 21.  1996
                                                                                  DRAFT
             HIGHLIGHT BOX 4-2
         Terminology and Definitions

         In the field of ecotoxicology, there
  historically have been multiple definitions for
  some terms, including definitions for direct
  effects, indirect effects, acute effects, chronic
  effects, acute tests, and chronic tests.  This
  multiplicity of definitions has resulted in
  misunderstandings and inaccurate communication
  of study designs.   {Definitions of these and other
  terms, as they are  used in this document, are
  provided in the glossary.  When consulting other
  reference materials, the user should evaluate how
  the authors are defining terms.
                                                           Each measurement endpoint
                                                    should represent the same exposure
                                                    pathway and toxic mechanism of action
                                                    as the assessment endpoint it
                                                    represents; otherwise, irrelevant
                                                    exposure pathways or toxic
                                                    mechanisms might be evaJuated.  For
                                                    example, if a contaminant primarily
                                                    causes damage to vertebrate kidneys,
                                                    the use of daphnids (which do not have
                                                    kidneys) would be inappropriate.

                                                          Potential measurement
                                                    endpoints in toxicity tests or in field
                                                    studies should  be evaluated according
                                                    to  how well they can answer questions
                                                    about the assessment endpoint or
                                                    support or refute the hypotheses
developed for the conceptual model.  Statistical Considerations, including sample size and
statistical power described in Section 4.3, also  must be considered in selecting the
measurement endpoints.  The following subsections describe additional considerations for
selecting measurement endpoints, including species/community/habitat (Section 4.1.1),
relationship to the contaminant(s) of concern (Section 4.1.2), and mechanisms of ecotoxicity
(Section 4.1.3).

4.1.1  Species/Community/Habitat Considerations

       The function of a measurement endpoint is to represent  an assessment endpoint for the
site. The measurement endpoint must allow clear inferences about potential changes in the
assessment endpoint. Whenever assessment and measurement endpoints  are not the same
(which usually  is the case), measurement endpoints should be selected to be inclusive of risks
to all of the species, populations, or groups included in the assessment endpoint that are  not
directly measured.  In other words, the measurement endpoir? should be representative of the
assessment endpoint for the site and not lead to an underestimate of risk to the assessment
endpoint.  Example  Box 4-2 illustrates this point for the  DDT site in  Appendix A.

       In selecting a measurement  endpoint, the species  and life stage, population, or
community chosen  should be the one(s)  most susceptible to the contaminant for the
assessment endpoint in question. For species and populations, this selection is based on a
review of the species:  (1) life  history; (2) habitat utilization; (3) behavioral characteristics;
and (4) physiological parameters.  Selection of measurement endpoints also should be based
                                                                           STEP 4, Page 5

-------
August :;.  ;996	DRAFT
                                  EXAMPLE BOX 4-2
                    Selecting Measurement Endpoints-DDT Site

          As described in Example Box 3-1. one of the assessment endpoints selected for the
   DDT site is the protection of piscivorous birds.  The belted kingfisher was selected as a
   piscivorous bird with the smallest home range that couid utilize  the area of the site, thereby
   maxirmzing the calculated dose to a receptor. In this illustration, the kingfishers are used as the
   most highly exposed of the piscivorous birds potentially present.  Thus, one can conclude that,
   if the nsk assessment shows no threat of eggshell thinning to the kingfisher, there should be
   minimal or no threat to other piscivorous birds that  might utilize the site.  Thus, eggshell
   thinning in belted kingfishers is an appropriate measurement endpoint for this site.
on which routes of exposure are likely.  For communities, careful evaluation of the
contaminant fate and transport in the environment is essential.

4.1.2  Relationship of the Measurement Endpoints to the Contaminant of
       Concern

       Additional criteria to consider when selecting measurement endpoints are inherent
properties (such as the physiology or behavioral characteristics of the species) or  life history
parameters that make  a species  useful in evaluating  the effects of site-specific contaminants.
For example, Chironomus lemans (a species of midge that is used as a standard sediment
toxicity testing  species in the larval stage) is considered more tolerant of metals contamination
than is C. npanus. a similar species (Klemm et al.,  1990; Nebeker et al.,  1984; Pascoe et al.,
1989).  To assess the  effects of exposure of benthic communities to metal-contaminated
sediment,  C. npanus  might be the better species to  use as a toxicity test organism for  many
aquatic  systems to ensure that risks are not underestimated.  In general, the most  sensitive of
the measurement endpoints appropriate for infemng risks to the  assessment endpoint should
be used-

       Some species have been identified as being particularly sensitive to certain
contaminants   For example, numerous studies have demonstrated that mink are among the
most sensitive of the tested mammalian species to the toxic  effects of PCBs (U.S. EPA,
1995a).  Species that  rely on quick reactions  or behavioral responses to avoid predators can
be particularly  sensitive to contaminants affecting the central nervous system, such as
mercury.  Thus, the sensitivity of the measurement  endpoint relative to the assessment
endpoint should be considered for each contaminant of concern.
STEP 4, Page 6

-------
 August 21. 1996	DRAFT

 4.1.3  Mechanisms of Toxicity

       A contaminant can exert adverse ecologicai effects in many ways.  First, a
 contaminant might affect an organism after exposure for a short penod of time  (acute) or after
 exposure over an extended penod of time (chronic).  Second, the effect of a contaminant
 could be  lethal (killing the organism) or sublethaJ  (causing adverse effects other than death,
 such as reduced growth,  behavioral changes,  etc.). Sublethal effects can reduce an organism's
 lifespan or reproductive success.  For example, if a contaminant reduces the reaction speed of
 a prey species, the  prey can become more susceptible to predauon.  Third, a contaminant
 might act directly  or indirectly on an  organism.  Direct effects include lethal or  sublethaJ
 effects of the chemical on the organism.  Indirect effects occur  when the contaminant
 damages the food, habitat, predator-prey, or competition of the  organism in its community.

       Mechanisms of ecotoxicity and exposure pathways have already been considered
during problem formulation and identification of the assessment endpoints.  However, toxicity
 issues are revisited when selecting appropriate measurement  endpoints to ensure that  the same
 toxic response that is of concern for the assessment endpoint is measured.


4.2    STUDY DESIGN

       In Section 4.1, one or more lines of evidence that could  be used to answer questions
or to test  hypotheses concerning the assessment endpoint(s) were identified.  This section
provides recommendations on how to design  a field study for  bioaccumulation and field
tissue residue studies (Section 4.2.1);  population/community  evaluations (Section 4.2.2); and
toxicity testing (Section 4.2.3). A thorough understanding of the strengths and limitations of
these types of field studies is necessary to properly design any investigation.

       Typically, no one  line of evidence can stand on its own.  Analytic chemistry on co-
located samples and other lines of evidence are needed to support a conclusion.   When
population/community evaluations are coupled with toxicity  testing and media chemistry, the
procedure often is  referred to as a triad approach (Chapman  et ah, 1992; Long and Chapman,
 1985).  This method has  proven effective in defining the area affected by contaminants  in
sediments of several large bays and estuaries.

       The development  of exposure-response relationships  is critical for evaluating nsk
management options; thus, for all three types of studies, sampling is applied to  a
contamination gradient when  possible as well as compared to reference data.  Reference data
are baseline values or characteristics that should be representative of the sue in  the absence of
contaminants released  from the site.  Reference data might be data collected from the site
before  contamination occurred or new data collected from a reference site. The reference site
can be the least impacted (or unimpacted) area of  the Superfund site or a nearby site that is


                                                                           STEP 4, Page 7

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

ecologically similar, but noc affected by the site's contaminants.  For additional information
on selecune and usins reference information in Superfund ecological nsk assessments, see
ECO  Update Volume 2. Number 1 (U.S. EPA, 1994e).

       The following subsections present a starting point for selecting an appropriate study
design for the different rypes of biological sampling that might apply to the sue investigation.

4.2.1   Bloaccumulation  and Field Tissue Residue Studies

       Bioaccumulation  and field tissue residue studies typically are  conducted at sites where
contaminants are likely to accumulate in food chains. The studies help to evaluate
contaminant exposure levels associated with measures of effect for assessment endpoint
species.

       The degree to which a contaminant is transferred through a food chain can be
evaluated in several ways.   The most common cype of study reported in the  Literature is a
contaminant bioaccumulation (uptake) study.  As indicated in Section 2.2.1,  the most
conservative BCF values identified  in the literature  almost always are used to estimate
bioaccumulation in a screening-level nsk assessment.  Where the  potential for overestimating
bioaccumulation by using conservative literature values to represent the site is substantial, a
site-specific  tissue residue study might be advisable (see Example Box 4-3).

       A tissue residue study generally is conducted on organisms that are in the exposure
pathway (i.e., food chain) associated with the assessment endpoint. Data  seldom are available
                                 EXAMPLE BOX 4-3
                             Bioaccumulation-ODT Site

          Data from the literature suggest that DDT can  bioaccumulate in aquatic food
   chains  as mucn as six  orders of magnitude  ' 10 ); however, in many systems, the actual
   bioaccumulation of DDT from the environment is substantially lower than 106.  Several
   factors influence the actual accumulation of DDT in the environment.   Because there is
   considerable debate over the parameters of proposed theoretical bioaccumulation
   models, it might be advisable to conduct a  site-specific study.
to link tissue residue levels in the sampled organisms to adverse effects.  Instead, literature
toxiciry studies usually are used to associate effects with an administered dose (or data that
can be converted to an administered dose) from a laboratory study. Thus, the purpose of a
field tissue residue study usually is to measure contaminant concentrations in foods consumed
STEP 4, Page

-------
August 21. 1996	 	          DRAFT

by the species associated with the assessment endpoint.  This measurement minimizes the
uncertainty associated with estimating a dose  (or intake) to that species, particularly in
situations in which several media and trophjc  levels are in the exposure pathway.

       The concentration of a contaminant in  the primary prey/food also should be linked to
an exposure concentration from a contaminated medium (e.g., soil,  sediment, water), because
it is the medium, not the food chain, that will be remediated.  Thus, contaminant
concentrations must be measured in environmental  media at the same  locations at  which the
organisms are collected along contaminant gradients and at reference locations.  Co-located
samples of the contaminated medium and organisms are needed to establish a correlation
between  the tissue residue levels and contamination levels in the medium under evaluation;
these  studies are most effective if conducted over a gradient of contaminant concentrations.
In addition,  tissue residues from sessile organisms (e.g., rooted plants, clams) are easier to
attribute lt> specific contaminated areas than are tissue residues from mobile organisms (e.g.,
fish).  Example Box 4-4 illustrates these concepts using the DDT site  example in
Appendix A.
                                 EXAMPLE BOX 4-4
                          Tissue Residue Studies-ODT Site

          In the DDT site example, a forage fish (e.g., creek chub) will be collected at
   several locations with known DDT concentrations  in sediments. The forage fish will be
   analyzed for body burdens of DDT, and the relationship between the DDT levels in the
   sediments and the levels in the forage fish will be  established. The forage fish DDT
   concentrations can be used to evaluate the DDT threat to piscivorous birds feeding  on
   the forage fish at each location. Using the DDT concentrations measured in fish that
   correspond  to a LOAEL and NOAEL for adverse effects in birds, the corresponding
   sediment contamination levels can be determined.  These sediment DDT levels can then
   be used to estimate a cleanup level that would reduce threats of eggshell thinning to
   piscivorous birds.
       Although it might seem obvious, it is important to confirm that the organisms
examined for tissue residue levels are in the exposure  pathways of concern established by the
conceptual model. Food items targeted for collection  should be those that are likely to
constitute a large portion of the diet of the species of concern (e.g., new growth on maple
trees as a food source for deer, rather than cattails) and/or represent pathways of maximum
exposure.  If not, erroneous conclusions or study delays and added costs can result.  Because
specific organisms often can only be captured in one season, the  timing of the study can be
critical, and failure to plan  accordingly can result in serious site management difficulties.

                                                                           STEP 4, Page 9

-------
August 21.  '^96     	DRAFT

       There are numerous factors that must be considered when selecting a species in which
to measure contaminant residue levels.  Several investigators have discussed the "ideal"
characteristics of the species to be collected and analyzed.  The recommendations by Phillips
(1977. 19"8) and Butler (1971) include that the species selected should be:

       (1)     Able to accumulate the chemical of concern without being adversely  affected
              by the levels encountered at the site;

       (2)     Sedentary (small home range) in order to be representative of the area of
              collection;

       (3)     Abundant in the study area; and

       (4)     Of reasonable size to give adequate  tissue for analysis (e.g., 10 grams for
              organic analysis and 0.5 gram for metal analysis for many laboratories).

Additional  considerations for some situations would be that the species is:

       (5)     Sufficiently long-lived to allow for sampling more than  one  age  class; and

       (6)     Easy to sample and hardy enough to survive in the laboratory (allowing for the
              organisms to eliminate some contaminants from their bodies prior to analysis, if
              desired, and allowing for laboratory  studies on the uptake of the contaminant).

       It is usually not possible or necessary to find  an organism that fulfills all of the above
requirements.  The  selection of an organism for tissue analysis should  balance these
characteristics with the hypotheses being tested, knowledge of the contaminants' fate and
transport, and the practicality of using the particular species.  In the following sections,
several of the factors mentioned above are described in greater detail.

       Ability to accumulate the contaminant.   The objecu\es of a tissue residue study
are (1) to measure bioavailabiliry  directly; (2) to provide site-specific estimates of exposure to
higher-trophic-level organisms; and (3) to relate tissue residue leve.s to concentrations in
environmental media (e.g., in soil, sediment, or water).  Sometimes ihese  studies cdso can be
used to link tissue residue levels with observed effects in the organisms sampled.  However,
in a "pure" accumulation study, the species selected  for collection and tissue analysis should
be ones that  can  accumulate a contaminant(s) without being adversely affected by the levels
encountered  in the  environment.  While it is difficult to evaluate  whether or not a population
in the field is affected by accumulation of a contaminant, it is important to try. Exposure that
results in adverse responses might alter the animal's feeding rates or  efficiency, diet, degree
of activity, or metabolic rate, and thereby influence the animal's daily intake or accumulation
of the contaminant and the estimated bioaccumulation factor (BAF).  For example,  if the rate

STEP 4, Page 10

-------
August :i. 1996	DRAFT

of bioaccumuJation of a contaminant in an organism decreases with increasing environmental
concentrations  (e.g., its toxic effects reduce food consumption rates), using a BAF determined
at low environmental concentrations to estimate bioaccumulauon at high environmental
concentrations  would overestimate risk. Conversely, if bioaccumulation increased with
increasing environmental concentrations (e.g., its toxic effects impair the organisms'  ability to
excrete the contaminant), using a BAF determined at low environmental concentrations would
underestimate risks at higher environmental concentrations.

       Consideration of the physiology and biochemistry of the species selected  for residue
analysis also is important.  Some species can metabolize certain organic contaminants) (e.g.,
fish can metabolize PAHs). If several  different types of prey are consumed by a species of
concern, it would be more  appropriate to analyze prey species that do not metabolize the
contaminant.

       Home range.  When selecting species for residue analyses, one should be confident
that the contaminant levels found in the organism depend on the contaminant levels in the
environmental media under evaluation.  Otherwise, valid conclusions  cannot be drawn about
ecological risks posed by contaminants at the site.  The home range, particularly the foraging
areas  within the home range, and movement patterns of a species are  important in making this
determination.  Organisms  do not utilize the environment uniformly.  For species that have
large  home ranges or are migratory, it can be difficult to evaluate potential exposure to
contaminants at the site.  Attribution of contaminant levels in an organism to contaminant
levels in the surrounding environment is easiest for animals with small home and foraging
ranges and limited movement patterns.  Examples of organisms with small home ranges
include young-of-the-year fish, burrowing Crustacea (such as fiddler crabs or some crayfish),
and small mammals.

       Species  also should be selected  for residue analysis to maximize the overlap between
the area of contamination and the species1 home range or feeding range. This provides a
conservative evaluation of potential exposure  levels.  The possibility that a species' preferred
foraging areas within a home range overlap the areas of maximum contamination also should
be considered.

       Population  size.  A species selected for tissue  residue analysis should be sufficiently
abundant  at the site that adequate numbers  (and sizes) of individuals  can be collected to
support the tissue mass requirements for chemical analysis and to achieve the sample size
needed for statistical comparisons. The organisms actually collected  should be  not only of
the same  species, but also of similar age or size to reduce data variability when  BCFs are
being evaluated.  The practicality of using  a particular species is evaluated in Step 5.

       Size/composites.  When selecting species in which to measure tissue residue levels,
it is optimum to have animals large enough for individual chemical analysis, without having

                                                                         STEP 4, Page 11

-------
August :i. 1996	DRAFT

to pool individuals. However, composite samples will be needed if individuals from the
species selected cannot yield sufficient tissue  for the required analytical methods. Linking
contaminant levels in organisms to concentrations in enviror mental  media is easier if
composites are made up of members of the same species, sex, size,  and age, and therefore
exhibit similar accumulation characteristics.  When deciding whether or not to pool  samples,
it is  important to consider what impact the loss of information on variability of contaminant
levels along these dimensions will have on data interpretation. The  size,  age, and sex of the
species collected should be representative of the range of prey consumed  by  the species of
concern.

       Summary.  Although it can be difficult to meet  all  of the suggested cntena for
selecting a species for tissue residue studies, an attempt should be made to meet as many
criteria as possible.  No formula is available for ranking  the factors in order of importance
within a particular site  investigation  because the ranking  depends on the study objectives.
However, a key criterion is that the organism  be sedentary or have a limited  home range.  It
is difficult to connect site contamination to organisms that migrate over great distances or that
have extremely large home ranges.  Further information on factors that can influence
bioaccumulation is available from the literature (e.g., Butler,  1971; Phillips, 1977, 1978, U.S.
EPA, 1995d).

4.2.2  Population/Community Evaluations

       Population/community evaluations, or biological field surveys, are  potentially useful
for both contaminants that are toxic to organisms through direct exposure  to the contaminated
medium and contaminants that bioaccumulate  in food chains.  In either case,  careful
consideration must be given to the mechanism of contaminant effects.  Since
population/community evaluations are  "impact' evaluations,  they typically are not predictive.
The release of the contaminant must already have occurred and exerted an effect in order for
the populationycommumry evaluation to be an effective tool  for a risk assessment.

       Population and community surveys evaluate the current status of an ecosystem, often
using several measures of population or community structure (e.g., standing biomass, species
richness) or  function (e.g., feeding group analysis). The  most commonly  used  measures
include  number of species and abundance of organisms in an  ecosystem.  It is difficult to
detect changes in top predator populations  affected by bioaccumulation of substances in their
food chain due to the mobility of top predators.  In addition, some populations, most notably
insects, can  develop a tolerance to contaminants (particularly  pesticides);  in these cases, a
populauonycommumry  survey would be ineffective for evaluating existing impacts.  While
population,community  evaluations can be useful, the nsk assessor snould  consider the level of
effort required as well  as the  difficulty in accounting for natural variability.
 STEP 4. Page 12

-------
 August 21. 1996	DRAFT

       A variety of population/community evaluations have been used at Superfund sites.
 Benthic  macroinvertebrate surveys are the most commonly conducted population/community
 evaluations.  There are methods manuals (e.g., U.S. EPA 1989c, 1990a) and publications.that
 describe the  technical procedures  for conducting these studies.  In certain instances, fish
 community evaluations have proven useful at Superfund sites. However, these investigations
 typically are  more labor-intensive and costly than a comparable macroinvertebrate study.  In
 addition, fish generally are not sensitive measures of the effects of sediment contamination,
 because  they usually are more mobile than benthic macroinvertebrates.  Terrestrial  plant
 community evaluations have been used to a limited extent at Superfund sites. For  those
 surveys, it is important to include information about historical land use  and physical habitat
 disruption  in the uncertainty analysis.

       Additional information on  designing field studies and on field study methods can be
 found in ECO  Update Volume 2,  Number 3 (U.S. EPA, 1994d).

       Although population- and community-level studies can be valuable, several factors can
 confound the interpretation of the  results.  For example,  many fish  and small mammal
 populations normally cycle in relation to population density, food availability, and other
 factors.  Vole populations have been known to reach  thousands  of individuals per acre and
 then to decline to as low as tens of individuals per acre the following years without an
 identifiable external  stressor (Geller, 1979). It is important that the "noise of the system" be
 evaluated so  that the impacts  attributed to chemical contamination at the site are not actually
 the result of different, "natural" factors.  Populations located relatively close to each other can
 be affected independently:  one might undergo a crash,  while  another is peaking. Physical
 characteristics of a site can isolate populations so that one population level is not a good
 indicator of another; for example,  a paved highway can be as  effective a barrier as  a river,
 and populations on either side can fluctuate independently.  Failure to evaluate these issues
 can result in  erroneous conclusions.  The level of effort required to resolve  some of these
 issues can  make population/community evaluations impractical in some  circumstances.

4.2.3  Toxicity Testing

       The bioavailability and toxicity of site contaminants can be  tested directly with
 toxicity tests.  As with other methods, it is critical that the media tested are in exposure
 pathways relevant to the assessment endpoint.  If the site conceptual model involves exposure
 of benthic  invertebrates to contaminated sediments, then a solid-phase toxicity test  using
 contaminated sediments (as  opposed to a water-column exposure test) and an infaunal species
 would  be appropriate.   As indicated earlier, the  species tested and the responses measured
 must be  compatible with the mechanism of toxjcity.  Some common site  contaminants are  not
 toxic to most organisms at the same environmental concentrations that threaten top predators
 because  the contaminant biomagnifies in food chains (e.g., PCBs);  toxicity  tests using
                                                                           STEP 4, Page  13

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

contaminated media from the site would not be appropriate for evaluating this type of
ecological threat.

       There are numerous U.S. EPA methods manuals and ASTM guides and procedures for
conducting to.xicity tests  (see references in the Bibliography).  While  documented methods
exist for a wide  variety of toxicity tests, particularly laboratory tests,  the risk assessor must
evaluate what a  particular toxicity test measures and, just as importantly, what it does not
measure.  Questions to consider when selecting an appropriate toxicity test include:

       (1)     What is the mechanism of toxicity of the contammant(s)?

       (2)     What contaminated media are being evaluated (water, soil, sediment)?

       (3)     What toxicity test species are available to test the media being evaJuated?

       (4)     What life stage of the species should be  tested?

       (5)     What should the  duration of the toxicity  test be0

       (6)     Should the test organisms be fed dunng  the test0

       (7)     What endpoints should be measured?

       There are a limited number of toxicity tests that are readily available for testing
environmental media.  Many of the aquatic toxicity tests were developed for the regulation of
aqueous discharges to surface waters.  These tests are useful, but one  must consider the
original purpose of the test

       New toxicity tests are being developed  continually and can be  of value  in designing a
site ecological nsk assessment.   However, when non-standard tests are used, complete
documentation of the specific test procedures is necessary to support use of the data.

       In  situ toxicity tests involve placing organisms  in locations that might be affected by
site contaminants and in  reference locations.  Non-native species should not be used, because
of the nsk of their release into  the environment in which they could adversely affect (e.g.,
prey on or outcompete) resident species.  In situ tests might provide more realistic evidence
of existing adverse effects than laboratory toxicity tests; however,  me investigator has little
control over  many environmental parameters and the experimental organisms  can  be  lost to
adverse weather or other events (e.g., human interference) at the site  or reference location.

        For additional information on using toxicity tests in ecological risk assessments, see
ECO Update Volume 2, Numbers 1 and 2 (U.S. EPA,  I994b.c).

STEP 4, Page 14

-------
 August 21. 1996	^	DRAFT

 4.3    DATA QUALITY OBJECTIVES AND STATISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS

       The SAP indicates the number and  location of samples to be taken, the number of
 replicates for each sampling location, and the method for determining sampling locations. In
 making these decisions, the investigator needs to consider, among other things, the DQOs and
 statistical methods that will be used to analyze the data.

 4.3.1  Data Quality Objectives

       The DQO process represents a series of planning  steps that can be employed
 throughout the development of the WP and SAP to ensure that the type, quantity, and quality
 of environmental data to be collected during the ecological investigation are adequate to
 support the intended application.  Problem  formulation in Steps 3 and 4 is essentially the
 DQO process. By employing problem formulation and the DQO process, the  investigator is
 able to define data requirements and error levels that are  acceptable for the investigation prior
 to the collection of data. This approach helps ensure that results are appropriate and
 defensible for decision making.  The specific goals of the general DQO process are to:

       •      Clarify the study objective and define the most appropriate types of data to
             collect;

       •      Determine the most appropriate field conditions under which to collect the data;
             and

       •      Specify acceptable levels of decision errors that will be used as the basis for
             establishing the quantity and quality of data needed to support risk management
             decisions.

 As the discussion of Steps 3 and 4 indicates,  these goals  are subsumed in the problem
 formulation phase of an ecological risk assessment Several  U.S. EPA publications provide
detailed descriptions  of the DQO process (U.S. EPA, 1993c,d,f, I994f). Because many of the
 steps of the DQO process  are already covered during problem formulation, the DQO process
 should be reviewed by the investigator and applied as needed.

 4.3.2  Statistical Considerations

       Sampling locations can be selected  "randomly" to characterize an area or non-
 randomly, as along a contaminant concentration gradient. The way in which sampling
 locations are selected determines which statistical tests, if any, are appropriate for evaluating
 test hypotheses.
                                                                         STEP 4, Page 15

-------
 August :i. !996	DRAFT

       For toxicity tests that use a small number of test and control organisms or for which
the toxic response in highly variable, the response rate of test animals often  must be relatively
high (e.2.. 30 to 50  percent) for the response to  be considered a LOAEL (i.e., statistically
different' than control levels).  If a LOAEL based on a 30 to 50 percent effect level is
unacceptable (e.g., a population is unlikely to sustain  itself with an additional 30 to 50
percent mortality), then the power of the study design must be increased, usually by ,
increasing sample size, but sometimes by taking full advantage  of all available information  to
improve the  power of the design (e.g., stratified  sampling, special tests for trends, etc.).  A
limitation on the use of toxicity values from the  literature  is that often, the investigator does
not discuss the  statistical power of the study design, and hence does not indicate the
minimum statistically detectable effect level.  Appendix D describes additional statistical
considerations,  including a description of Type I and Type n error, statistical power,
statistical models, and power efficiency.
4.4    CONTENTS OF WORK PLAN AND SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS PLAN

       The WP and SAP for the ecological investigation should be developed as part of the
initial RI sampling event if possible. If not, the WP and SAP can be developed as an
additional phase of the site investigation.  In either case, the format of the WP and SAP
should be similar to that described by U.S. EPA (1988a, 1989b). Accordingly, these
documents should be consulted when developing the ecological  investigation WP and SAP.

       The WP and SAP are typically written as separate documents.  When developed as
separate documents, the WP can be submitted to the risk manager for review prior to the
development of the SAP and any differences in approach can be resolved prior to the
development of the SAP  For some smaller sites, however, it might be more practical to
combine  the WP and SAP into a single  document.  If the WP and SAP are combined, the
investigators should discuss  the overall objectives and  approach of the WP/SAP document
with the risk manager pnor to its development to ensure agreement from all parties about the
approach being taken for the investigation.

       The WP and SAP are briefly described in Sections  4.4.1 and 4.4.2, respectively.  A
plan for testing the SAP before the sue  WP and SAP are signed and the investigation begins
is described  in Section 4.4.3.

4.4.1  Work Plan

       The purpose of the WP is to document the decisions and evaluations made during
problem  formulation and to  identify additional investigative tasks needed to complete the
evaluation of risks to ecological resources. As presented in U.S. EPA (1988a), the WP
generally includes the  following:


STEP 4, Page 16

-------
August 21. 1996                                                                   DRAFT

       •      A general overview and background of the site including the site's physical
              setting, ecology, and previous uses;

       •      A summary and analysis of previous site investigations and conclusions;

       •      A site conceptual model, including an identification of the potential exposure
              pathways selected for analysis, the assessment endpomts and questions or
              testable hypotheses, and the measurement endpoints selected for analysis;

       •      The identification of additional site  investigations needed to conduct the
              ecological risk assessment; and

       •      A description of assumptions used and the major sources of uncertainty in the
              site  conceptual model and existing information.

The general scope of the additional sampling activities also is presented in the WP.  A
detailed description of the additional sampling activities is presented in the SAP along with an
anticipated schedule of the site activities.

4.4.2  Sampling and  Analysis Plan

       The SAP typically consists of two components:  a field sampling plan (FSP) and a
quality assurance project plan  (QAPP).  The FSP provides guidance for all field work by
providing a detailed description of the  sampling and  data-gathering procedures to be used for
the project.  Meanwhile, the QAPP provides a description of the steps required to achieve the
objectives dictated by the intended use of the data.

       Field sampling plan. The FSP provides a  detailed description of the samples
needed to meet the objectives  and scope of the  investigation outlined in the WP.  The FSP for
the ecological assessment should be  detailed enough that a sampling team unfamiliar with the
site would be  able to gather all the samples and/or required  field data based on the guidelines
presented in the document  The FSP for the ecological investigation should include a
description of the following elements:

       •      Sampling type and objectives;
       •      Sampling location, timing, and frequency;
       •      Sample designation;
       •      Sampling equipment and procedures; and
       •      Sample handling and  analysis.

A detailed description of these elements for chemical analyses is provided in Appendix B of
U.S. EPA (1988a).  Similar specifications should be developed for the biological sampling.

                                                                          STEP 4, Page 17

-------
August I!. 1996
                                        DRAFT
       Quality assurance project plan.  The objective of the quality assurance project
plan (QAPP^ is to provide a description of the policy, organization, functional activities, and
quahtv control protocols necessary for achieving the study objectives.  Highlight Box 4-3
presents the elements typically contained in a QAPP.
       L.S. EPA has prepared guidance on
the contents of a QAPP (U.S. EPA, 1987a,
1988a, 1989a).  Formal quality assurance
and quality control (QA/QC) procedures
exist for  some types of ecological
assessments, for example,  for laboratory
toxicity tests on aquatic species.  For
standardized laboratory tests, there  are
formal QA/QC procedures that specify (1)
sampling and handling  of hazardous wastes;
(2) sources and cultunng of test organisms;
(3) use of reference toxicants, controls,  and
exposure  replicates; (4) instrument
calibration; (5) record keeping; and (6) data
evaluation. For other types of ecological
assessments, however, QA/QC procedures
are less well defined (e.g., for biosurveys of
vegetation, terrestrial vertebrates).  BTAG
members can provide-input on appropriate
QA/QC procedures based on their experience
            HIGHLIGHT BOX 4-3
            Elements of a QAPP

      (1)   Project description
      (2)   Designation of QA/QC
             responsibilities
      (3)   Statistical tests arid data quality
             objectives
      (4)   Sample collection and chain of
             custody
      (5)   Sample analysis
      (6)   System controls and preventive
             maintenance
      (7)   Record keeping
      (8)   Audits
      (9)   Corrective actions
     (10)   Quality control reports
with Superfund sites.
4.4.3  Field Verification of Sampling Plan and  Contingency Plans

       For biological sampling,  uncontrolled variables can influence the availability of species
to be sampled, the efficiency of different types of sampling techniques, and the level of effort
required to achieve the sample sizes specified in  the SAP. As  a consequence, the nsk
assessor should develop a plan to test the sampling design before ±e WP and SAP arc signed
and the sue investigation begins. Otherwise, field sampling dunng the site  investigation could
fail to  meet the DQOs  specified in  the SAP. and the  study cou'd fa:! :o meer its objectives.
Step 5 provides a description  of the field verification process.

       To the extent that potential  field problems can be  anticipated, contingency plans also
should be specified in the SAP   An example of  a contingency plan is provided-in Step 5
(Example Box 5- i i
STEP 4. Page 18

-------
August 21. 1996	^	DRAFT

4.5    SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION POINT (SMDP)

       The completion  of the ecological nsk assessment WP and  SAP should coincide with
an SMDP  Within this SMDP, the ecological nsk assessor and the ecological nsk manager
agree on:  11) selection of measurement endpomts;  (2) selection of specific investigation
methodology; and (3) selection of data reduction and interpretation methods.  The WP or SAP
also should specify how inferences will be drawn from the measurement to the assessment
endpomts.
4.6    SUMMARY

       At the conclusion of Step 4, there will be an agreement on the contents of the WP and
SAP.  AS noted earlier, these plans can be parts of a larger WP and SAP that are developed
to meet other remedial investigation needs, or they can be separate documents. When
possible,  any field sampling efforts for the ecological risk assessment should overlap with
other site data collection efforts  to reduce sampling costs and to prevent redundant sampling.

       The WP and/or the SAP  should specify the methods by which the collected data will
be analyzed.  The plan(s) should include all food-chain-exposure-model parameters, data
reduction techniques, data interpretation methods, and statistical analyses.
                                                                        STEP 4, Page 19

-------
August :i.  1996	DRAFT

          STEP 5:   FIELD VERIFICATION OF SAMPLING DESIGN
                                      OVERVIEW

            Before the WP  and  SAP  is signed, it  is important  to verify that  the field
      sampling plan as specified in the  WP and SAP is appropriate and implementable at
      the site.  During the field verification of the sampling plan, the testable hypotheses,
      exposure pathway  models,  and  measurement  endpoints are evaluated for their
      appropriateness and implementabiliry.  The assessment endpoint(s), however, should
      not be under evaluation in this step; the appropriateness of the assessment endpoint
      should have been resolved in Step 3.  If the assessment endpoint is changed at this
      step, the risk assessor must return  to Step 3,  because the entire process leading to the
      actual  site investigation in Step 6 assumes  the selection of the  correct assessment
      endpoints.
5.1    PURPOSE

       The primary purpose of field verification of the sampling plan is to ensure that the
samples specified by the SAP actually can be collected.  A species that will be associated
with a measurement endpoint and/or exposure point concentration should have been observed
at the preliminary site characterization or noted during previous site visits.  During this step,
previously obtained information should be verified and the feasibility of sampling will need to
be checked by a site visit.  Preliminary sampling will determine  if the targeted  species is
present and—equally important—collectable  in sufficient numbers or total biomass to meet
data quality  objectives. This preliminary field assessment also allows for final  confirmation
of the  habitats that exist on or near the site.  Habitat maps are verified a final time, and
interpretations of aenal photographs can be checked.

       Final decisions on reference areas also should be  made in this step.  The reference
areas should be chosen to isolate a particular variable at  the site (e.g., chemical
contamination, rock cobble  stream). Parameters to be evaluated for similarity include, but are
not limited to:  slope, habitat, species  potentially present, soil and sediment characteristics,
and for surface waters, flow rates, substrate type, water depth, temperature, turbidity, oxygen
levels, water hardness, pH,  and other standard water quality parameters. If several on-site
habitats or habitat  variables are being  investigated, then several reference areas could be
required. Reference areas should be as free of site-related contaminants as practical.
                                                                          STEP 5, Page 1

-------
August :i. !996	DRAFT

5.2    DETERMINING SAMPLING FEASIBILITY

       \Vben sampling biota, it is difficult to predict what level of effort will be necessary to
obtain an adequate number of individuals of the required size. Some preliminary field
measurements often can help determine adequate sampling efforts to attain the sample sizes
specified in  the SAP for statistical analyses.  The WP and SAP should be signed and the site
investigation should be implemented immediately after verification of the sampling design to
limit effects of uncontrolled field variables.  For example, evaluation of current small
mammal population density might indicate to the investigator that 400 trap-nights instead of
50 are necessary to collect  the required number of small mammals in the specified time.  If
there is a time lag between the field sampling venficauon and the actual site investigation,  it
could be necessary to revenfy the field sampling to determine  if conditions have changed.

       Sarnpling methods for abiotic media also should be tested.  There is a wide variety of
sampling devices and methods, and it is important to use  the most appropriate, as the
following examples  illustrate:

       •       When  sampling a stream's surface water, if the stream is only three inches
              deep,  collecting the water directly into 32-ounce bottles would not be practical.

       •       Sampling the substrate in a stream might be desirable, but if the substrate  is
              bedrock, it might not be feasible or the intent of the sampling design.

       An expo sure-response  relationship between contamination and biota response is a key
component  of establishing causality during the analysis phase of the baseline risk assessment
(Step  6). If extentof-contarmnation sampling is conducted in phases, abiotic exposure media
and biotic samples must be collected simultaneously because the interactions (both temporal
and spatial)  between  the matrix to be remediated and the  biota are crucial to the development
of a field exposure-response relationship.  Failure to collect one sample properly or to
coordinate samples temporally can significantly impact the interpretation of the data.

       These and other problems associated with the practical  implementation of sampling
should be resolved pnor to finalizing the SAP to  the  extent practicable.  Assessing the
feasibility of the sampling plan before the site investigation begins saves costs in the long
term because it minimizes the chances of failing to meet  data quality objectives during the
sue investigation.

       Sampling locations need to be checked to make sure  that they are appropriately
described and placed within the context of the sampling plan.  Directions for a  sediment
sample "to  be laken  5 feet  from the north side of stream  A," could cause confusion if the
stream is only 4 feet wide, or if the sampler doesn't  know if the sample should be taken in
STEP 5. Page 2

-------
August 21.  1996 	                                            DRAFT

the stream, or 5 feet away from the edge of the stream.  All samples should be checked
against the intended use of the data to be obtained.

       Contaminant migration pathways might have changed, either due to natural causes
(e.g., storms) or during site remediation  activities (e.g., erosion channels might have been
filled or dug  up to prevent further migration of contaminants).  Channels of small or large
streams, brooks, or nvers might have moved;  sites might have been flooded.  All of the
assumptions of the  migration and exposure  pathways need to be venfied prior to the full  site
investigation.  If a contaminant gradient  is necessary for the sampling plan, it is important to
verify that  the gradient exists and that the range of contaminant concentrations is appropriate.
A gradient of contamination that causes  no  impacts at the highest concentration measured has
as little value as a gradient that kills everything at the lowest concentration measured; in
either case, the gradient would not provide  useful exposure-response  information.  A gradient
verification requires chemical sampling,  but field screening-level analyses might be effective.

      All  pathways for the  migration of contaminants off site should be evaluated, such as
windblown dust, surface water runoff, and erosion.   Along these pathways,  a gradient of
decreasing  contamination with increasing distance from the site might exist. Site-specific
ecological evaluations and risk assessments  can be more useful to nsk managers if gradients
of contamination can be located and evaluated.

      Example Boxes 5-1 and 5-2 describe the field verification of the sampling plan for the
copper and DDT sites illustrated  in Appendix  A. Note that the scope of the field verification
differs for the copper and DDT sites.  For the DDT  site, a modification to the study design
was  necessary.  For both sites, the issues were resolved and a sign-off was  obtained at the
SMDP for this step.

      Any change in measurement endpoints will require that exposure pathways to the  new
measurement endpoint be checked.  The  new measurement endpoint must fit into the
established conceptual model.  Changes  to measurement endpoints might require revision of
the conceptual model and agreement to the  changes  at the SMDP  It is highly desirable  that
the agreed-upon conceptual model should be modified and approved  by the same basic group
of individuals who developed it.
5.3    SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION  POINT (SMDP)

       The SMDP for the field verification of the sampling plan is the signing of the
finaliied WP and SAP.  Any changes to the investigation proposed in Step 4 must be made in
consultation with the nsk manager and the risk assessors.  The nsk manager must understand
what changes have been made and why, and must ensure that the  nsk management decisions
can be made from the information that the new  study design can provide. The risk assessors

                                                                          STEP 5, Page 3

-------
 Ausrust 21. 1996                                                                      DRAFT
                                   EXAMPLE BOX 5-1
                   Field Verification of Sampling Plan-Copper Site

            Copper was released from a seep area of a landfill adjacent to a small pond: the
      release and resulting elevated copper levels in the pond are of concern.  The problem
      formulation and conceptual model stated that the assessment endpomt was the maintenance
      of a tvpicaJ pond community for the area, including the benthic invertebrates and fish.
      Toxicity testing was  selected to evaluate the potential toxicity of copper to aquatic
      organisms.  Three toxicity tests were selected: a 10-day solid-phase sediment toxicity test
      (with the amphipod Hyalella azteca), and two water column tests (i.e., the 7-day growth
      test wuh the green aJga Selenasirum capricornutum and the fathead minnow, Pimephales
     promelas, 1-day larval growth test).  The study design specified that sediment and water
      for the toxicity tests would be collected at the leachate seeps known to be at the pond
     edge, and at three additional equidistant locations transecting the pond (including  the point
     of maximum pond depth). The pond contains water year-round;  however, the seep flow
     depends on rainfall.  Therefore, it is only necessary to verify that the leachate seep will be
     active at the time of sampling.
must be involved to ensure that the assessment endpoints and  testable  hypotheses are  still
being addressed.

       In  the worst cases, changes in the measurement endpoints could be necessary,  with
corresponding changes to the risk hypotheses and sampling design.  Any new measurement
endpoints  must be evaluated according to their utility  for inferring changes  in the assessment
endpoints  and their compatibility with the sue conceptual model (from Steps 3 and 4). Loss
of the relationship between measurement endpoints and the assessment endpoints, the
questions  or :estable hypothesis, and the site conceptual model will result in a failure  to meet
study objectives.

       Despite one's best efforts to conduct a sound site assessment, unexpected
circumstances might still make it necessary for changes of the sampling  design to be  adopted
in the field during the  sue investigation  stage. In these instances, the changes should be
wntten and  initialled by those agreeing to the change in consultation with the nsk assessor
and nsk manager

       Once the finalized WP and SAP  art approved and signed.  Step 6 should begin.
STEP 5, Page 4

-------
 August 21.  1996                                                                      DRAFT
                                    EXAMPLE BOX 5-2
                      Field Verification of Sampling Plan-DDT Site

           For the stream DDT site, the assessment endpoint was protection  of piscivorous birds
   from adverse reproductive effects. The conceptual model included the exposure pathway of
   sediment to forage fish to the kingfisher.  The measurement endpoint selected was tissue residue
   levels in creek chub, which could be associated with contaminant levels in sediments.  Existing
   information on the stream contamination indicates that a gradient of contamination exists and
   that five specific sampling locations should be sufficient to characterize the gradient to the point
   where concentrations are unlikely to have adverse effects. The study design specified that
   10 creek chub of the same size and sex be collected at each location.  Each chub should be
   approximately 20 grams, so that minimum sample mass requirements could be met without
   relying on the use of composite samples for analysis. In addition, QA/QC protocol requires  that
   10 more fish be collected at one of the locations.

           In this example, a site assessment is necessary to verify that a sufficient  number of
   creek chub of the specified size are present to meet the  sampling requirements.  Stream
   conditions must be evaluated to determine what fish sampling technique will work at the
   targeted locations.  A field assessment  was conducted, and several fish collection techniques
   were used in order to determine which  was the most effective for the site.  Collected creek chub
   and other fish were examined to determine the size range available and whether  the sex of the
   individuals could be determined.

          The site assessment indicated that the creek chub might not be present in sufficient
   numbers to provide the necessary biomass for chemical  analyses. Based upon these findings, a
   contingency plan was agreed to, which  stated that both the creek chub and the longnosed dace
   (Rhinichthys cataractae) would be collected.  If the creek chub were collected at all locations in
   sufficient numbers, then these samples  would be analyzed and the dace would be released. If
   sufficient creek chub could not be collected but sufficient longnosed dace could, the longnosed
   dace would be analyzed and the creek chub released. If neither  species could  be collected at all
   locations m sufficient numbers, then a mix of the two species would be used; however, for any
   given sampling location only one species would be used to make the sample.  In addition, at
   one location,  which preferably had high DDT levels in the sediment, sufficient numbers (20
   grams) of both species  would be collected to allow comparison (and calibration) of the
   accumulation between the two species.
5.4    SUMMARY

       In summary,  field verification of the sampling plan is very important to ensuring that
the data quality objectives of the site investigation can be met. This step verifies that the
selected assessment  endpoints, testable hypotheses, exposure pathway model, measurement
endpoints, and study design  from Steps 3 and 4 are appropriate and implementable at the  site.

                                                                               STEP 5, Page 5

-------
 August I!.  1996	_	DRAFT

 By verifying the field sampling plan pnor to conducting the full site investigation, well-
 considered alterations can be made to the study design and/or implementation if necessary.
 These changes will ensure that the ecological nsk assessment  meets the study objectives.
STEP 5, Page 6

-------
August 21.  1996	                                                   DRAFT

         STEP 6:  SITE  INVESTIGATION AND ANALYSIS PHASE
                                     OVERVIEW
            Information collected during the site investigation is used in the analysis phase
      of the,baseline ecological nsk assessment to characterize exposures and ecological
      effects. The site investigation includes all of the field sampling and surveys that are
      conducted as part of the ecological risk assessment.  The site investigation and
      analysis of exposure and effects should be,straightforward, following the work plan
      (WP) and sampling and analysis plan (SAP) developed in Step 4 and tested in Step 5.
            Exposure characterization relies heavily on data from the site investigation and
     can involve fate and transport modeling.  Much of the information for characterizing
     potential ecological effects was gathered from the literature review during problem
     formulation, but the site investigation might provide evidence of existing ecological
     impacts and additional exposure-response information.
6.1    INTRODUCTION

       The site investigation (Section 6.2) and analysis phase (Section 6.3) of the ecological
risk assessment should be straightforward.  In Step 4, all issues related to the study design,
sample collection, data quality objectives, and procedures for data reduction  and interpretation
should have been identified and resolved. However, as described in Step 5,  there arc
circumstances  that can anse during a site investigation that could require modifications to the
original study  design.  If any unforeseen events do require a change to the WP or SAP, all
changes must be agreed  upon at the SMDP (Section 6.4).  The results of Step 6 are used to
characterize ecological risks in  Step 7.
6.2    SITE INVESTIGATION

       The WP for the site investigation is based on the site conceptual model and should
specify the assessment endpoints, questions, and testable hypotheses.  The SAP for the site
investigation should specify the relationship between measurement and assessment endpoints,
the necessary number, volume, and types of samples to be collected, and the sampling
techniques to be used.  The SAP also should specify the data reduction and interpretation
techniques and the DQOs.  The feasibility of the sampling design was tested in Step 5.

                                                                         STEP 6, Page 1

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

Therefore, the site investigation should be a direct implementation of the previously designed
study.

       During the sue investigation, it is important to adhere to the DQOs  and to any
requirements for co-located sampling.  Failure to collect one sample properly or to coordinate
samples temporally can  significantly affect  interpretation of the data.  Changing field
conditions (Section 6.2.1) and new information on the nature and  extent of contamination
(Section 6.2.2) can require a change in the  SAP

6.2.1  Changing Field Conditions

       In instances where unexpected conditions arise in the field that make the collection of
specified samples impractical or not ideal, the ecological risk assessor should reevaluate the
feasibility of the sampling design as described in Step 5.  Field efforts should not necessarily
be halted, but decisions  to change sampling procedures or design must be agreed to by the
site manager and  risk assessor or project-delegated equivalents.

       Field modifications to study designs  are not uncommon during field  investigations.
When the WP and SAP  provide a precise conceptual  model and study design with specified
data analyses, informed  modifications to the SAP can be made to comply with the objectives
of the study.  As  indicated in Step 4, contingency plans can be included in  the original SAP
in anticipation of  situations  that might arise  during the site investigation (see Example Box
6-1).
                                EXAMPLE BOX 6-1
                    Fish Sampling Contingency Plan-DDT Site

          At the DDT site where creek chub are to be collected for DDT tissue residue analyses.
   a contingency plan for the sice invesugauon was developed.  An alternate species, the longnosed
   dace, was specified with the expectauon that, at  one or all  locations, ihe  creek chub might be
   absent at the time of the site uwestigauon (see also Example Box 4-4). These contingencies are
   prudent even when the venficaiion of the field sampling design described in Step 5 indicates that
   the samples are obtainable.
6.2.2  Unexpected Nature or Extent of Contamination

       It is not uncommon for an initial sampling phase of the RI to reveal that
contamination at levels of concern extend beyond areas initially established for characterizing
contamination and ecological effects at the  site or that  contaminant gradients  are much steeper

STEP 6. Page 2

-------
August:!.  1996	DRAFT

than anticipated.  If this contingency changes the opportunity for evaluating biological effects
along a contamination gradient, the ecological risk assessor and risk manager need to
determine whether additional  sampling (e.g., further downstream from the site) is needed.
Thus, u is important for the ecological risk assessor to track information on the nature and
extent of contamination  as RI sampling is conducted.

       On occasion,  new contaminants are identified dunng an RI.  In this case,  the risk
assessors and site manager will need to return to Step 1 to screen the new contaminants for
ecological nsk.

       Immediate analysis of  the data for each type of sampling and communication between
the risk assessors and nsk managers can help ensure that the site investigation is adequate to
achieve the study goals and objectives when field modifications are necessary. If a change to
the WP oY SAP is needed, the risk assessor and risk manager must agree on all changes (the
SMDP in Section 6.4).
6.3    ANALYSIS OF ECOLOGICAL EXPOSURES AND EFFECTS

       The analysis phase of the ecological risk assessment consists of the technical
evaluation of data on existing and  potential exposures (Section 6.3.1) and ecological effects
(Section 6.3.2) at the site.  The-analysis is based on the information collected during Steps 1
through 5  and often includes additional assumptions or models to interpret the data in the
context of the site conceptual  model.  As illustrated in Exhibit 6-1, analysis of exposure and
effects is performed interactively, with the analysis of one  informing the analysis of the other.
This step follows the data interpretation and analysis methods specified in the WP and SAP,
and therefore should be a straightforward process.

       In the analysis phase, the site-specific data obtained during the site investigation
replace many of the assumptions that were  made for the screening-level analysis in Steps  1
and 2.  For the exposure and ecological effects characterizations, the uncertainties ass~riated
with the field measurements and with assumptions where site-specific data are not available
must be documented.

6.3.1  Characterizing Exposures

       Exposure can be expressed as the co-occurrence or  contact of the stressor with the
ecological components, both in time and space (U.S. EPA, 1992a).  Thus, both  the stressor
and the ecosystem  must be characterized on similar temporal  and spauai scales.  The result of
the exposure analysis is an exposure profile which quantifies  the magnitude  and spatial and
temporal patterns of exposure as they relate to the assessment endpoints and questions
                                                                         STEP 6, Page 3

-------
August I!. .996
                                                                                 DRAFT
                                     EXHIBIT 6-1
                                   Analysis  Phase
                                              WSK CHARACTEW2ATUX
                              PROBLEM FORMULATION
        Chartctcnutkxi of Exposure
Cfiaractartzatlon of Ecological Effacta
Stmsaor
Characterization:
Olitrtoutton or
Ptttam of Chanoa



Ecoayatam
Charactartzation;
Btoifc
AbkMic



Evaluation
EtfactaOatt
                                                  Ecological
                                                  R««pona*
                                                   Analyvia
                               RISK CHARACTERCATTON
O
»
a
                                                                                 c_
                                                                                 7
                                                                                 *
                                      o

                                      5"
                                      09
                                      a

                                      o
                                                                                 
-------
 August 21. 1996
                                   DRAFT
developed dunng problem formulation.  The exposure profile and a description of associated
uncertainties and assumptions serve as input to the risk characterization in Step 7.

       Stressor characterization involves determining the stressor's distribution and pattern of
change.  The analytic  approach for characterizing ecological exposures should have been
established in the WP and SAP on the basis of the site conceptual model.  For chemical
stressors at Superfund sites, usually a combination of fate and transport modeling and
sampling data from the site are used to predict the current and likely future nature and extent
of contamination at a  site. A variety of modeling approaches are available for estimating
chemical fate and transport, and bioaccumulation; however, a description of the approaches
and their relative strengths and  weaknesses is beyond the scope of this guidance. Additional
information on this topic can be found in
multiple governmental and academic
sources; however, these  are areas of active
research and require consultation with the
BTAG to identify the  most up-to-date
approaches.
       When characterizing exposures, the
ecological context of the site established
during problem formulation is analyzed
further, both to understand potential effects
of the ecosystem on fate and transport of
chemicals in the environment and to
evaluate site-specific characteristics of
species or communities of concern.  Any
site-specific information that can be used to
replace assumptions based on information
from  the literature or from other sites is
incorporated into the description of the
ecological components of the site.
Remaining assumptions and uncertainties in
the exposure model (Highlight  Box 6-1) should be documented.

6.3.2  Characterizing Ecological Effects

       At this  point, all evidence for existing and potential adverse effects on the assessment
endpoints is analyzed. The information from the literature review on ecological effects is
integrated with any  evidence of existing impacts based on the site investigation.  The methods
for analyzing site-specific data should have been specified in the WP and SAP, and thus
should be straightforward. Both exposure-response information and evidence that site
contaminants are causing or can cause  adverse effects are evaluated.
        HIGHUGHT BOX 6-1
  Uncertainty in Exposure Models

       The "accuracy"  of an exposure
model depends on the accuracy of the input
parameter values and the validity of the
model's structure (i.e.,  the degree to which it
represents the  actual relationships among
parameters at the site).  Field measurements
related to model outputs or intermediate
model results can be used to help calibrate
and validate an exposure model for a
particular site. Such field measurements
should be specified in the WP and SAP
For example, studies of tissue residue levels
often are used to calibrate exposure and
food-chain models.
                                                                            STEP 6, Page 5

-------
August 21.  1996	DRAFT

       Exposure-response analysis.  The exposure-response  analysis for a Super-fund site
describes the relationship between the magnitude, frequency, or duration of a contaminant
stressor in  an experimental or observational setting  and the magnitude of response.  In this
phase of the analysis, measurement endpoints are related to the  assessment endpoints using
the logical  structure provided by the conceptual model. Any extrapolations that are required
to relate measurement to assessment endpoints (e.g., between species, between response
levels, from laboratory to field) are explained. Finally, an exposure-response relationship is
described to the extent possible (e.g., by a regression equation),  including the confidence
limits (quantitative or qualitative) associated with the relationship.

       Under some circumstances, site-specific exposure-response  information can be
obtained by evaluating existing ecological  impacts along a contamination gradient at the  site.
Various statistical regression techniques can be used to identify or describe the relationship
between e-xposure and response from the field data.  In these cases, the potential for
confounding stressors that might correlate with the contamination gradient should be
considered  (e.g., decreasing water temperature downstream of a site; reduced soil erosion
further from a site).

       An exposure-response analysis is of particular importance to nsk managers who must
balance human  health and ecological concerns against the feasibility and  effectiveness of
remedial options. An exposure-response function can help a risk manager to specify the
trade-off between the degree of cleanup and likely benefits of the cleanup and to balance
ecological and financial costs and benefits of different remedial options, as discussed in
Step 8.

       When exposure-response data are not available or cannot  be developed, a threshold for
adverse effects  can be developed instead, as in Step 2.  For the baseline risk  assessment,
however, site-specific information should be used instead of conservative assumptions
whenever possible.

       Evidence of causality.  At Superfund sues, it is important to evaluate the strength
of the causaJ association between site-related contaminants and effects on the measurement
and assessment endpoints.  Demonstrating a correlation between a  contaminant gradient  and
ecological impacts at a site is a key component of establishing causality, but other evidence
can be used in  the absence of such  a demonstration. Moreover,  an exposure-response
correlation  at a site is not sufficient to demonstrate  causality, but requires one or  more types
of supporting evidence and analysis of potential confounding factors. Hill's  (1965) cntena
for evaluating causal associations are outlined in the Framework (U.S. EPA, 1992a).
STEP 6. Page 6

-------
August 21.  1996  	                                        DRAFT

6.4    SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION POINT (SMDP)

       An  SMDP dunng the site investigation and analysis phase is needed oniy if alterations
to the WP  or SAP become necessary. In the  worst cases, changes in measurement endpoints
could be required,  with corresponding changes to  the testable hypotheses and sampling
design.  Any new measurement endpoints must be evaluated according to their utility for
inferring changes in the assessment endpoints and their compatibility with the site conceptual
model; otherwise, the study could fail to meet its objectives.

       Proposed changes to the SAP must be  made in consultation with the nsk manager and
the risk assessor. The risk manager must understand what changes have  been made and why,
and must ensure that the  risk management decisions can be made from the information that
the new study design  can provide.  The risk assessor must be involved to ensure that the
assessment endpoints  and study questions or testable  hypotheses are still  being addressed.
6.5    SUMMARY

       The site investigation step of the ecological risk assessment should be a
straightforward implementation of the study designed in Step 4.  In instances where
unexpected conditions arise in the field that indicate a need to change the study design, the
ecological risk assessor should reevaluate the feasibility or adequacy of the sampling design.
Any proposed changes to the WP or SAP must be agreed upon by both the risk assessor and
the risk manager.

       The analysis phase of the ecological nsk assessment consists of the technical
evaluation of data on existing and potential exposures and ecological effects and is based on
the information collected during Steps 1 through  6.  Analysis of exposure and effects is
performed interactively,  and follows the data interpretation and analysis methods specified in
the WP and SAP  Site-specific data obtained during Step 6 replaces many  of the assumptions
that were made for the screening-level analysis in Steps 1 and 2. Evidence of an exposure-
response relationship between contamination and ecological responses at a site helps to
establish causality.  The results of Step 6 are used to characterize ecological risks in Step 7.
                                                                          STEP 6, Page 7

-------
 August 21. 1996	DRAFT

                     STEP 7:  RISK CHARACTERIZATION
                                      OVERVIEW

             In risk characterization, data on exposure and effects are integrated into a
      statement about risk to the assessment endpoints established during problem
      formulation. A weight-of-evidence approach is used to interpret the implications
      of different studies or tests for the assessment endpoints.  In a well-designed
      study, data  analysis should be straightforward, because the procedures were
      established  in the WP and SAP. The risk characterization section of the baseline
      ecological risk assessment should include a qualitative and quantitative
      presentation of the risk results and associated uncertainties.
7.1    INTRODUCTION

       Risk characterization is the final phase of the risk assessment process and includes two
major components:  risk estimation and risk description (U.S. EPA, 1992a; Exhibit 7-1).  Risk
estimation consists of integrating the exposure profiles with the exposure-effects information
(Section 7.2) and summarizing the associated uncertainties (Section 7.3).  The risk description
provides information important for interpreting the risk results and, in the Superfund Program,
identifies a threshold for adverse effects on the assessment
endpoints (Section 7.4).

       It is U.S. EPA policy that risk characterization should be consistent with the values of
"transparency, clarity, consistency, and reasonableness" (U.S. EPA,  1995f).  "Well-balanced
risk characterizations present risk conclusions and  information regarding the strengths and
limitations of the assessment for other risk assessors, EPA decision-makers, and the public"
(U.S. EPA,  19950-  Thus, the documentation of risks should be easy to follow and to
understand,  with all assumptions, defaults, uncertainties, professional judgments,  and any
other inputs to the risk estimate clearly identified and easy  to find.
7.2    RISK ESTIMATION

       Documentation of the risk estimates should describe how inferences are made from the
measurement endpoints to the assessment endpoints established in  problem formulation.  As
stated earlier, it is not the purpose of this document to provide a detailed guidance on  the

                                                                          STEP 7, Page 1

-------
Aueusi I!. !?96
DRAFT
                                     EXHIBIT 7-1

                               Risk Characterization
Risk Estimation
Irrttgrsttoo


RlskOtsc
rirxtofl '


Urtc*rUUnty


r

Risk
Summary
'
'

ln»«rpr»utlon
Ecologies
Slgnlflcsnc*




                               DlsctASion 3«tor*«n th«

                            RJsk ASMSMX and Rlak

                                     (R««ulU)
                                                                           B


                                                                           n
                                                                           a
                                                                           c
                                                                           O


                                                                           •

                                                                           a

                                                                           2
                                                                           o
                                                                           3
                                                                           O
                                  Risk

 STEP 7, Pagt 2

-------
 August:!. 1996        	^	DRAFT

 selection  and utilization of risk models.  The risk assessor should have developed and the risk
 manager should have agreed upon the model used to characterize risk,  its assumptions,
 uncertainties, and interpretation in  Steps 3 through 5.  This agreement is specified in  the site
 WP and SAP and is the purpose of the SMDPs in Steps 3 through 5.

       Unless the site investigation during  Step 6 discovers new information, the risk
 assessment should move smoothly through the risk characterization phase, because the
 analysis procedures were specified in the WP and SAP. While it might be informative to
 investigate a data set for trends, outliers, or other statistical indicators, these  investigations
 should be secondary to the data interpretations specified in the SAP  Unless a data
 interpretation process is specified in the SAP and followed during nsk characterization,
 biased,  seriously  conflicting, or superfluous conclusions might be obtained.  Those outcomes
 can divert or confound  the nsk characterization process.

       For ecological risk assessments that entail more than one type of study (or line of
 evidence), a  strength-of-evidence approach  is used to integrate different types of data to
 support a conclusion. The data might include toxiciry test results, assessments of existing
 impacts at a  site, or risk calculations comparing exposures estimated for the site with toxicity
 values from the literature.  Balancing and interpreting the different types of data can be a
 major task and require professional judgment.  As indicated above, the  strength  of evidence
 provided by different types of tests and the precedence that one type of study might have over
 another should already have been established during Step 4.  Taking this approach will ensure
 that data interpretation is objective and not biased to support a preconceived  answer.
 Additional strength-of-evidence considerations at this stage include the degree to which DQOs
 were met  and whether confounding factors  became evident in the site investigation and
 analysis phase.

       For some  biological tests (e.g., toxicity tests, benthic macroinvertebrate studies), all or
 some of the  data  interpretation process is outlined in existing  documents, such as in  toxicity
 testing manuals.  However, in most cases, it will be necessary for the SAP to provide details
on how the data are to be interpreted for a  site.  The data interpretation methods also should
be presented  in the risk characterization documentation. For example, if the  triad approach
 was used  to evaluate contaminated sediments, the risk estimation section should describe how
 the three types of studies (i.e., toxiciry test, benthic invertebrate survey, and  sediment
 chemistry) are integrated to draw conclusions about nsk.

       Where exposure-response functions  are not available or developed, the quotient
 method of comparing an estimated exposure concentration to a threshold for response can be
 used, as in Step 2.  Whenever possible, however, presentation of full exposure-response
 functions  provides the risk manager  with more information on which to base site decisions.
 This guidance has recommended the use of on-site contamination gradients to demonstrate on-
 site exposure-response functions.  Where such data have been collected, they should be

                                                                           STEP 7, Page 3

-------
August I!  1996	_	DRAFT

presented along with the nsk estimates.  Hazard indices, the results of in situ toxicity testing,
or community survey data can  be  mapped along with analytic chemistry data to provide a
clear picture of the relationship between areas of contamination and effects.
7.3    RISK DESCRIPTION

       A key to nsk description for Superfund sites is documentation of environmentaJ
contamination levels that bound the threshold for adverse effects on the assessment endpoints
(Section 7.3.1). The nsk descnption also provides information to help the nsk manager judge
the ecological significance  of the estimated nsks (Section 7.3.2).

7.3.1   Threshold for Effects on Assessment Endpoints

       Key outputs of the nsk characterization step are contaminant concentrations in each
environmentaJ medium that bound the threshold for estimated adverse ecological effects based
on the  uncertainty inherent in the data and models used.  The lower bound of the threshold
would  be based on consistent conservative assumptions and NOAEL toxicity values.  The
upper bound would be based on observed impacts or predictions  that ecological impacts could
be occurring.  This upper bound would be developed using consistent assumptions, site-
specific data, LOAEL  toxicity values, or  an impact evaluation.

       The approach to estimating environmental contaminant concentrations that represent
thresholds for adverse .ecological effects should have  been specified in the study  design.
When  higher-trophic-level organisms are  associated with assessment endpoints, the study
design  should have descnbed how monitoring data and contaminant transfer models would be
used to back^alculate  an environmental concentration representing a threshold for effect.  If
the site investigation demonstrated a gradient of ecological effects along a contamination
gradient,  the nsk assessor can identify and document the  levels of contamination below which
no further improvements in the measurement  (or assessment)  endpoints are discernable.  If
departures from the  onginal analysis plan are necessary based on information obtained  during
the sue investigation or data  analysis phase,  the reasons for change should be documented.

       When assessment endpoints include populations of animals  that can travel moderate
distances, different ways of presenting a  threshold for adverse effects are possible.  Various
combinations of level  of contamination and areal extent of contamination relative to  the
foraging  range of the animals can result  in similar contaminant  intake levels by the animals.
In this case, a point of departure  for identifying  a threshold for  effect would be to identify
that level  ot contamination, which if uniformly distributed both at  the site and beyond, would
not pose  a threat.  The assumption of uniform contamination  has been used to back-calculate
water quality cntena to protect piscivorous wildlife in the Great Lakes (U.S. EPA, 1995a).
Again, use of this approach should have  been specified in the study  design.

STEP 7. Page 4

-------
 August 21. 1996	DRAFT

 7.3.2  Additional Risk Information

       In addition to developing numerical estimates of existing impacts, risks, and thresholds
 for effect, the nsk assessor should put the estimates in context with a description of their
 extent, magnitude, and potential ecological significance. Additional ecological nsk
 descriptors are listed  below:

       •      The location and areal extent of existing  contamination above a threshold for
              adverse effects;

       •      The degree to  which the threshold for contamination is exceeded or is likely to
              be exceeded in the future, particularly if exposure-response functions are
              available;  and
              The expected "half-life" (qualitative or quantitative) of contaminants in the
              environment (e.g., sediments, food chain) once the sources of contamination are
              removed.

To interpret the information- in light of remedial options, the risk manager might need to
solicit input from specific experts.


7.4    UNCERTAINTY ANALYSIS

       There are several sources of uncertainties associated with Superfund risk estimates.
One  is the initial selection of substances of concern based on the sampling data and available
toxicity information.  Other sources of uncertainty include estimates of toxicity to ecological
receptors at  the site based on limited data from the laboratory  (usually on other species), data
from other ecosystems, or data from the site over a limited period of time. Additional
uncertainties result from the exposure assessment, as a consequence in the uncertainty in
chemical monitoring data and models used to estimate exposure concentrations or doses.
Finally, further uncertainties are included in nsk estimates when simultaneous exposures to
multiple substances occurs.

       Uncertainty should be distinguished from  variability, which arises from true
heterogeneity or variation in characteristics of the environment and receptors.  Uncertainty, on
the other hand, represents lack of knowledge about certain factors which can be reduced by
additional study.

       This section briefly notes several categories of uncertainty (Section 7.4.1) and
techniques  for tracking  uncertainty through a risk assessment (Section 7.4.2).  Additional


                                                                            STEP 7, Page 5

-------
August :i.  1996	DRAFT

guidance on discussing uncertainty  and variability in risk characterization is provided in U.S.
EPA's (1992D Guidance on Risk Characten-anon for Risk Managers and Risk Assessors.

7.4.1  Categories of Uncertainty

       There are three basic categories of uncertainties that apply to Supcrfund site risk
assessments: (I) conceptual model uncertainties; (2) natural variation and parameter error;  and
(3) model error.  Each of these is described below.

       There will be uncertainties associated with the conceptual model used as the basis to
investigate the site.  The  initial characterization of the ecological problems at a Superfund
site, likely  exposure pathways, chemicals of concern, and exposed ecological components,
requires professional judgments and assumptions. To the extent possible, the nsk assessor
should describe what judgments and assumptions were included in the conceptual model that
formed the basis of the WP and SAP

       Parameter values (e.g.,  water concentrations, tissue residue levels, food ingestion rates)
usually can be characterized as a distribution of values, described by central tendencies,
ranges, and percentiles, among other descriptors.  When evaluating uncertainty  in parameter
values, it is important to distinguish uncertainty from variability.  Ecosystems include highly
variable abiotic (e.g., weather,  soils)  and biotic (e.g., population density)  components.  If all
instances of a parameter (e.g.,  the weight of all  members of a population) could be sampled,
the "true"  parameter value distribution could be described.  For realistic sampling efforts,
however, only a  fraction of the instances (e.g., a few of the members of the population) can
be sampled, leaving uncertainty concerning the true parameter value distribution.  The risk
assessor should provide either  quantitative or qualitative descriptions of uncertainties in
parameter value distributions.

       Finally, there is uncertainty associated with how well a model  (e.g., fate and transport
model) approximates true relationships between site-specific environmental conditions.
Models  available at present tend to be fairly simple and at best, only partially validated with
field tests.  As a consequence, it is important to  identify key model assumptions and their
potential impacts on the nsk estimates.

7.4.2  Tracking Uncertainties

       In general, there are two approaches to tracking uncertainties through a  nsk
assessment: d)  using various point estimates of exposure and  response to develop one or
more point estimates of nsk (e.g., central tendency and high end); and (2) conducting  a
Monte Carlo  simulation to predict a  full distribution of risks based on  a distribution of
exposures and exposure-response information.
STEP 7, Page 6

-------
August 21. 1996                                                                    DRAFT

       Although Monte Carlo approaches to traciung uncertainty have become widely used in
risk  assessment in recent  years, the potential pitfalls  of such an approach must be appreciated.
It is  critical that parameters that covary are not modeled  as though they are independent of
one  another. A variety of techniques can be used to establish a covanance in a Monte Carlo
simulation,  depending on the software being used.  However, if data to describe the
distribution of  input parameters are limited, the level of confidence in the output distribution
is similarly low.  Finally, combining both uncertainty (e.g., no site-specific information on
what an animaJ eats,  many non-detects in the chemical analyses) and natural  variability (e.g.,
in body weight, measured contaminant levels)  to run a  single Monte Carlo is not particularly
helpful.  It is more appropriate to evaluate natural variability  within a single simulation and to
evaluate  uncertainty using a sensitivity analysis.
7,5    SUMMARY

       Risk characterization integrates the results of the exposure profile and exposure-
response analyses, and is the final phase of the risk assessment process.  It consists of risk
estimation and risk description, which together provide information to help judge the
ecological significance of risk estimates in the absence of remedial activities. The risk
description also identified a threshold for effects on the assessment endpoint as a range
between contamination levels identified as posing no ecological risk and the lowest
contamination levels identified as likely to produce adverse ecological effects. To ensure that
the risk characterization  is transparent, clear, and reasonable,  information regarding the
strengths  and limitations of the assessment must be identified and described.
                                                                             STEP 7, Page 7

-------
August 21.  1996	                                         DRAFT

                         STEPS:  RISK MANAGEMENT
                                     OVERVIEW

            Risk management at a Superfund site is the responsibility of the site risk
      manager, who must balance risk reductions associated with cleanup of
      contaminants with potential impacts  of the remedial actions themselves.  In Step
      7. the nsk assessor identified a threshold for effects on the assessment endpoint as
      a range between contamination levels identified as posing no ecological nsk and
      the lowest contamination levels identified as likely to produce adverse ecological
      effects.  In Step 8, the risk manager  evaluates  several factors in deciding whether
      or not to clean  up to within that range.
8.1    INTRODUCTION

       Risk management is a distinctly different process from nsk assessment (NRC, 1983,
1994; U.S.  EPA, 1984b, 1995f). The nsk assessment establishes that a risk is present and
defines a range or magnitude of the risk.   In risk management, the results of the risk
assessment  are integrated with other considerations to make and justify risk management
decisions.  Additional risk  management considerations can  include the implications of existing
background levels of contamination, available technologies, tradeoffs between human and
ecological concerns, and costs of alternative actions, to decide what  actions to take.
8.2    ECOLOGICAL RISK MANAGEMENT IN SUPERFUND

       According to section 300.40 of the NCP, the purpose of the remedy selection process
is to eliminate, reduce, or control risks to human health and the environment.  The NCP
indicates further  that the results of the baseline nsk assessment will help to establish
acceptable exposure levels for use in developing remedial alternatives in the feasibility study
(FS). Based on the criteria for selecting the preferred remedy and, using  information from the
human health and ecological  risk assessments and the evaluation of remedial options in the
feasibility study (FS), the risk manager then selects a preferred remedy.

       The nsk manager must consider several types  of information in addition to the
baseline ecological nsk assessment when evaluating remedial options (Section 8.2.1). Of
particular concern for ecological risk management at  Superfund sites is the potential for
remedial actions themselves to cause adverse ecological impacts (Section 8.2.2).  There also

                                                                        STEP 8, Page 1

-------
August :i  1996	DRAFT

exists the opportunity to monitor ecological components of the site to gauge the effectiveness
(or impactsi of the selected remedy (Section 8.2.3).

8.2.1  Other  Risk Management Considerations

       The baseline ecological nsk assessment is not the only set of information that the risk
manager must  consider when evaluating remedial options during the FS phase of the
Superfund process.  The NCP specifies that each remedial alternative should be evaluated
according to the following cntena:
       (1)
Overall protection of human  health and the environment;
       (2)    Compliance with applicable or relevant and appropriate requirements (ARARs)
             (unless waiver applicable);

       (3)    Long-term effectiveness and  permanence;

       (4)    Reduction of toxicity,  mobility, or volume of hazardous wastes through the use
             of treatment;

       (5)    Short-term effectiveness;

       (6)    Implementability;

       (7)    Cost;

       (8)    State acceptance; and

       '9>    Community acceptance.

       Additional factors that the site ask manager takes into consideration include existing
background levels (see U.S.  EPA.  1994g); current and likely future land uses (see  U.S. EPA,
I995c); current  and Likely future resource uses in the area;  and local, regional, and national
ecological significance of the site.

       Consideration of the  ecological impacts of remedial options and residual asks
associated with  leaving contaminants in place are very important considerations. These
considerations are described  in the next secuon (8.2.2).
STEP 8, Page 2

-------
August 21.  1996	                                                          DRAFT

8.2.2  Ecological Impacts of Remedial Options

       Management of ecological risks must take into account the potential for impacts to the
ecological  assessment endpomts from  implementation of various remedial options. The risk
manager must balance:  (1) residual risks posed by site contaminants before and/or after
implementation of the selected remedy with (2) the potential impacts of the selected remedy
on the environment independent of contaminant effects.   The selection of a remedial
alternative  could require tradeoffs between long-term  and short-term risk.

       The ecological risks posed by the "no action" alternative are the risks estimated by the
baseline ecological risk assessment.  For all other remedial options, there might be some
ecological impact associated with  the remedy.  This impact could be anything from a short-
term loss to complete and permanent loss of the present habitat and ecological communities.
In instances where substantial ecological impacts will result from the remedy (e.g., dredging a
wetland), the risk manager will need to consider ways to mitigate the impacts of the remedy
and compare the mitigated impacts to  the threats posed by the  site contamination.

       During the FS, the boundaries of potential risk under the no-action alternative (i.e.,
baseline conditions) can be compared with the evaluation of potential impacts of the remedial
options to help justify the preferred remedy.  As indicated above, the preferred remedy should
minimize the risk of long-term impacts that could result from the remedy and any residual
contamination.  When the selected remedial option leaves some site contaminants presumed to
pose an ecological risk in  place, the justification for the  selected remedy must be clearly
documented.

       In short, consideration of the environmental effects of the remedy itself might result in
a decision to allow contaminants to remain on site at levels higher than the threshold for
effects on the assessment endpoint. Thus, selection of the most appropriate ecologically-
based remedy can result in residual contaminant levels and ecological impacts for which the
PRPs remain responsible.

8.2.3  Monitoring

       Ecological risk assessment is a relatively new  field with limited data available to
validate or  calibrate its predictions.  At sites where remedial actions are taken to reduce
ecological impacts and risks, the results of the remediation efforts should  be  compared with
the predictions made during the ecological risk assessment.

       While it often is difficult to demonstrate the effectiveness of remedial actions in
reducing human health nsks, it often  is possible to demonstrate the effectiveness of
remediations to reduce ecological  risks, particularly if a several-year monitoring program is
established. The site conceptual model provides the conceptual basis for  monitoring options,

                                                                         STEP 8, Page 3

-------
 August:!.  :?96	DRAFT

 and the sue investigation  should have indicated which options might be most practical for the
 site   Monitoring aJso is important to assess the effectiveness of a no-action alternative.  For
 example, monitoring sediment contamination and benthic communities at  intervals following
 removal of a contaminant source allows one to test predictions of the potential for the
 ecosystem to recover naturally over time.
8.3    SCIENTIFIC/MANAGEMENT DECISION POINT (SMDP)

       The risk management decision is finalized in the Record of Decision (ROD).  The
decision should minimize the nsk of long-term impacts that could result from the remedy and
any residual contamination.  When the selected remedy leaves residual contamination at levels
higher than the upper-bound estimate of the threshold for  adverse effects on the assessment
endpoint, the risk manager should justify the decision.
8.4    SUMMARY

       Risk management decisions are the responsibility of the sue  manager (the nsk
manager), not the nsk assessor. The nsk manager should have been involved in the nsk
assessment from the beginning; knowing the options available for reducing risks, the nsk
manager can help to frame questions during the problem formulation phase of the nsk
assessment.

       The nsk manager must understand the nsk assessment, including its uncertainties,
assumptions, and level of resolution of the assessment.  With an understanding of potential
adverse effects posed by residual levels of sue contaminants and posed by the remedial
actions themselves, the nsk manager can balance the ecological costs and benefits of the
available  remedial options. Understanding the uncertainties associated with the  risk
assessment also is cntical to evaluating the overall protectiveness of any remedy.
STEP 8. Page 4

-------
August 21. 1996	^	               DRAFT

                                      GLOSSARY
       This glossary  includes definitions from several sources. A superscript number next to
a word identifies the  reference from which the definition was  adapted (listed at the end of the
Glossary).

Abiotic.  Characterized by absence of life; abiotic materials include non-living environmental
media (e.g., water,  soils, sediments); abiotic characteristics include such factors as light,
temperature, pH, humidity, and other physical and chemical influences.

Absorption Efficiency.  A measure of the proportion of a substance that a living organism
absorbs across exchange boundaries (e.g., gastrointestinal tract).

Absorbed Dose.  The amount of a substance penetrating the  exchange  boundaries of an
organism after contact. Absorbed dose for the inhalation and  ingestion routes of exposure is
calculated from  the intake and the absorption efficiency.  Absorbed dose for dermal contact
depends  on the surface area exposed and absorption efficiency.

Accuracy.4  The degree  to which a measurement reflects the true value  of a variable.

Acute.5  Having a sudden onset or lasting a short time. An acute  stimulus is severe enough
to induce a response rapidly.  The word acute can be  used to define either the  exposure or the
response to an exposure (effect).  The  duration of an acute aquatic toxicity test is generally 4
days or less and mortality is the response usually measured.

Acute Response. The response of (effect on) an organisms which has a rapid onset.  A
commonly measured rapid-onset response in toxicity tests is mortaliry

Acute Tests.  A toxicity test of short duration, typically 4 days or less (i.e., of short duration
relative to the  Ufespan of the test organism).

Administered Dose.2  The mass  of a substance  given to an organism and in contact with an
exchange boundary (i.e., gastrointestinal tract) per unit body weight (BW) per  unit time (e.g.,
mg/kgBW/day).

Adsorption.14 Surface retention of molecules, atoms, or ions by a solid or liquid, as  opposed
to absorption,  which is penetration  of substances into the bulk of a solid or liquid.

Area Use Factor.  The ratio of an organism's home range, breeding range, or
feeding/foraging range to the  area of contamination of the  site under investigation.
                                                                       GLOSSARY, Page 1

-------
 Augusi I!.  1996	DRAFT

 .Assessment Endpoint.6  An explicit expression of the environmental value that is to be
 protected.

 Benthic Community.  The community of organisms dwelling at ihe bottom of a pond, river,
 lake, or ocean.

 Bioaccumulation 5  General term describing a process by which chemicals are  taken up by an
 organism either directly from exposure to  a contaminated medium or by consumption of food
 containing  the chemical.

 Bioccumulation Factor 3  The ratio of the  concentration of a contaminant in an organism to
 the concentration in the ambient environment at steady state.

 Bioassay.5  Test used to evaluate the relative potency of a chemical by comparing its effect
on living organisms with the effect of a standard preparation on the  same type of organism.
 Bioassay and toxicity tests are not the same—see toxicity test.

Bioassessment.  A general term referring to  environmental evaluations involving living
organisms;  can include bioassays, community analyses, etc.

Bioavailability 4  The degree to which a material in environmental media can be assimilated
by an organism.

 Bioconcentration 5  A process  by which there is a net accumulation of a chemical directly
 from an exposure medium into  an organism.

 Biodegrade.    Decompose into more elementary compounds by the action of living
 organisms,  usually referring to microorganisms such as bacteria.

 Biomagnification."  Result of the process  of bioaccumulation and biotransfer  by which tissue
 concentrations of chemicals in organisms at one trophic  level exceed tissue concentrations in
 organisms at the next lower trophic  level in a food chain.

 Bicmarker.'  Biochemical, physiological, and rustological changes in organisms that can be
 used to estimate either exposure to chemicals or the effects of exposure to chemicals.

 Biomonitoring.   Use of Living organisms as "sensors" in environmental quality surveillance
 to detect changes in environmental conditions that might threaten living organisms in the
 environment.

 Body Burden.  The concentration or total amount of a substance in a living organism;
 implies accumulation of a substance above background levels in exposed organisms.

 GLOSSARY, Page 2

-------
August 21.  1996	                                     DRAFT

Breeding Range. The area utilized by an organism during the reproductive phase of its life
cycle and dunng the time that young are reared.

Bulk Sediment.   Field collected sediments used to conduct toxicity tests; can contain
multiple contaminants  and/or unknown concentrations of contaminants.

Characterization of Ecological Effects.6 A portion of the analysis phase of ecological risk
assessment that evaluates the ability of a stressor to cause adverse effects under a particular
set of circumstances.

Characterization of Exposure.6 A portion of the  analysis phase of ecological nsk
assessment that evaluates the interaction of the stressor with one or more ecological
components.  Exposure can be expressed as co-occurrence, or contact depending on the
stressor and ecological component involved.

Chemicals of Potential Concern.2  Chemicals that are potentially site-related and whose data
are of sufficient  quality for use in a quantitative risk assessment.

Chronic.5  Involving a stimulus that is lingering or continues for a long time; often signifies
periods  from several weeks to years, depending  on  the reproductive life cycle of the species.
Can be used to define either the exposure or the  response to an exposure (effect).  Chronic
exposures typically induce a biological response of relatively slow progress and long duration.

Chronic Response. The response of (or effect on) an organism to  a chemical that is not
immediately or directly lethal to the organism.

Chronic Tests.9  A toxicity test used to study the effects of continuous, long-term exposure
of a chemical or other  potentially toxic material on  an organism.

Community.6 An assemblage of populations of different species within a specified location
and time.

Complexation.14  Formation  of a group of compounds in which a pan of the molecular
bonding between compounds  is of the coordinate type.

Concentration.  The relative amount of a substance in an  environmental medium, expressed
by relative  mass (e.g.,  mg/kg), volume (ml/L), or number of units (e.g., parts per million).

Concentration-Response Curve.5 A curve describing the  relationship between exposure
concentration and percent of the test population responding.
                                                                      GLOSSARY, Page 3

-------
August 211906	DRAFT

Conceptual Model.6  Describes a series of working hypotheses of how the stressor might
affect ecological components.  Describes ecosystem or ecosystem components potentially at
risk, and the relationships  between  measurement and assessment  endpomts and exposure
scenarios.

Contaminant  of (Ecological) Concern. A substance detected at a hazardous waste site that
has the potentiaJ to affect ecological receptors adversely due to its concentration, distribution,
and mode of toxiciry.

Control.5  A treatment in  a toxicity test that duplicates all the conditions of the exposure
treatments but contains no test material.  The control is used to determine the response rate
expected in the test organisms in the absence of the test material.

Correlation.10  An estimate of the  degree to which two sets of variables vary together,  with
no distinction between dependent and independent variables.

Critical Exposure Pathway. An exposure pathway which either provides the highest
exposure levels or is the primary pathway of exposure to an identified receptor of concern.

Degradation.'4 Conversion of an organic compound to one containing a smaller number of
carbon atoms.

Deposition.14  The lying, placing, or throwing down of any material.

Depuration.5  A process that results in  elimination of toxic substances from an organism.

Depuration Rate.  The rate at which a  substance is depurated from an organism.

Dietary Accumulation.   The net accumulation of a substance by an organism as a result of
ingestion in the diet.

Direct Effect (toxin).   An effect where the suessor itself acts directly on the ecological
component of interest, not  through other components of the ecosystem.

Dose.    A measure of exposure. Examples include  (1) the amount of a chemicaJ ingested,
(2) the amount of a chemical absorbed,  and  (3) the product of ambient exposure concentration
and the duration of exposure.

Dose-Response Curve."  Similar to concentrauon-response curve except that the dose (i.e. the
quantity) of the chemicaJ administered to the organism is known.  The curve is plotted as
Dose  versus Response.
GLOSSARY, Page 4

-------
A"gust:i.  1996	DRAFT

Duplicate.   A sample taken from and representative of the same population as another
sample.  Both samples are carried through the steps  of sampling, storage, and analysis in an
identical manner.

Ecological Component.   Any part of an ecosystem, including individuals, populations,
communities, and the ecosystem itself.

Ecological Risk Assessment.6  The process that evaluates the likelihood that adverse
ecological effects may occur or are occurring as a result of exposure to one or  more  stressors.

Ecosystem.  The biotic community and abiotic environment within a  specified location and
time.

Ecotoxicity.    The study of toxic effects on nonhuman organisms, populations, or
communities.

Estimated or Expected Environmental Concentration.5 The concentration of a material
estimated as being likely to occur in environmental media to which organisms are exposed.

Exposure.6 Co-occurrence of or contact between a stressor and an ecological component.
The contact reaction  between a chemical and a biological system, or organism.

Exposure Assessment.2 The determination or estimation (qualitative or quantitative) of the
magnitude, frequency, duration, and route of exposure.

Exposure Pathway.2 The course a chemical or physical agent takes from a source to an
exposed organism.  Each exposure pathway incudes a source or release from a  source, an
exposure point,  and an exposure route.  If the exposure point differs from the source,
transport/exposure media (i.e.,  air, water) also are included.

Exposure Pathway Model.  A model in which potential pathways of exposure are identified
for the selected receptor species.

Exposure Point.2  A location of potential contact between an organism and a chemical or
physical  agent.

Exposure Point Concentration. The concentration  of a contaminant  occurring at an
exposure point.

Exposure Profile.6  The product of characterizing exposure in the analysis phase of
ecological nsk assessment.  The exposure profile summarizes the  magnitude and spatial and
temporal patterns of  exposure for the scenarios described in the conceptual model.

                                                                      GLOSSARY, Page 5

-------
August 21.  1996	DRAFT

Exposure Route.:  The way a chemical  or physical agent comes in contact with an organism
(i.e., by mgestion.  inhalation, or dermal contact).

Exposure Scenario.6  A set of assumptions concerning how an exposure takes place,
including assumptions  about the exposure setting, stressor characteristics, and activities of an
organism that can lead to exposure.

False Negative.  The conclusion  that an event (e.g.,  response to a chemical) is negative when
it is in fact positive.

False Positive.   The conclusion  that an event is positive when it is  in fact negative.

Fate.5  Disposition of a material in various environmental compartments (e.g. soil or
sediment, .water,  air,  biota) as a result of  transport, transformation, and degradation.

Food-Chain Transfer.  A process by which substances in the tissues of lower-trophic-level
organisms are transferred to the higher-trophic-level organisms that  feed on them.

Forage (feeding) Area. The area  utilized by an organism for hunting or gathering food.

Habitat.1   Place where a plant or animal  lives, often characterized by a dominant plant form
and physical characteristics.

Hazard.  The likelihood that a substance will cause an injury or adverse effect under
specified conditions.

Hazard Identification.   The process of  determining whether exposure to a stressor can
cause an  increase in  the incidence of a particular adverse effect, and whether an adverse
effect is likely to occur.

Hazard Quotient.'  The ratio  of an exposure level to a substance to a toxicity value selected
for  the nsk assessment for that substance (e.g.. LOAEL or NOAJEL).

Home  Range.   The area to which an animal confines its activities.

Hydrophilic."  Denoting the property of attracting or associating with water  molecules;
characteristic of  polar or charged molecules.

Hydrophobic.1-  With regard  to a molecule or side group, tending  to dissolve readily  in
organic solvents, but not in water,  resisting wetting, not containing  polar groups or sub-
groups.
GLOSSARY, Page 6

-------
 August 21. 1996	                                          DRAFT

 Hypothesis.  -  A proposition set forth as an explanation for a specified phenomenon or group
 of phenomena.

 Indirect Effect.6  An effect where the stressor acts on supporting components of the
 ecosystem, which in turn have an effect on the ecological component of interest.

 Ingestion Rate. The rate at  which an organism consumes food, water, or other materials
 (e.g., soil, sediment).  Ingestion  rate usually is expressed in terms  of unit of mass or volume
 per unit of time (e.g., kg/day, L/day).

 lonization.    The process by which a neutral atom loses or gains electrons, thereby acquiring
 a net charge  and becoming an ion.

 Lethal.5  Causing death by direct action.

 Lipid.1   One of a variety of organic  substances that are insoluble in polar solvents, such as
 water, but that dissolve readily in non-polar organic solvents.  Includes fats, oils, waxes,
 steroids, phospholipids, and carotenes.

 Lowest-Observable-Adverse-Effect Level  (LOAEL).  The lowest level of a stressor
 evaluated in a toxicity test or biological field survey that has a statistically  significant adverse
effect on the  exposed organisms  compared with unexposed organisms in a control or
 reference site.

 Matrix.14   The substance in which an analyte is embedded or contained;  the properties of a
 matrix depend on its constituents and  form.

 Measurement Endpoint.6  A measurable ecological characteristic that is related to the valued
characteristic chosen as the assessment endpomt.  Measurement endpomts often are  expressed
as the statistical or arithmetic summar-es of the observations that make up the measurement.
As used in this guidance document, measurement  endpoints can  include measures of effect
and measures of exposure.

 Media.15  Specific environmental compartments—air, water, soil—which are the subject of
 regulatory concern and activities.

 Median Effective Concentration (EC50).5  The concentration of a substance to which test
organisms are exposed that is estimated to be effective in producing some  sublethal response
 in 50 percent of the test population. The EC50 usually is expressed as a time-dependent
 value (e.g., 24-hour EC50).  The sublethal response elicited from  the test organisms as a
 result of exposure must be clearly defined.
                                                                      GLOSSARY. Page 7

-------
August ::.  .^96	DRAFT

Median Lethal Concentration (LC50).5  A statistically or graphically estimated
concentration that is expected to be lethaJ to 50  percent of a group of organisms under
specified conditions.

Metric.16  Relating to  measurement; a type  of measurement—for example a measurement of
one of various components of community structure (e.g., species richness, % similarity).

Mortality.   Death rate or proportion of deaths in a population.

No-Observed-Adverse-Effect L«vel (NOAEL).5 The highest level of a stressor evaluated in
a toxicity test or biological field survey thai  causes no statistically  significant difference in
effect compared with the controls or a  reference  site.

Nonparametric.17  Statistical  methods that make no  assumptions regarding the distribution of
the data.

Parameter.18  Constants applied to a model that are  obtained  by theoretical calculation or
measurements taken at  another time and/or place, and are assumed  to  be appropriate for the
place  and time being studied.

Parametric u Statistical methods used when the distribution  of the data is known.

Population.6 An aggregate of individuals of a species within  a specified location in space
and time.

Power.10 The power of a statistical test indicates the probability of rejecting the null
hypothesis  when  it should be  rejected (i.e.. the null hypothesis is false).  Can be considered
the sensitivity of a statistical test.  (See  also Appendix D.)

Precipitation.    In analytic chemistry, the process of producing a  separable solid phase
within a liquid medium.

Precision.'    -\ measure of the closeness of  agreement among :ndividual measurements.

Reference  Site.    A relatively unconiaminated site used for comparison to contaminated sites
in environmental monitonng studies, often incorrectly referred to as a control.

Regression Analysis.10   .Analysis of  the functional  relationship between two variables; the
independent van able is described on the X axis and the dependent  variable is described on the
Y axis (i.e. the change in Y is a function of a change in X).
GLOSSARY. Page 8

-------
August 21. 1996	_	                 DRAFT

Replicate.  Duplicate analysis of an individual sample.  Replicate analyses are used for
quaJitv control.

Representative Samples 18 Serving as a typical or characteristic  sample: should provide
analytical results that correspond  with actual environmental quality or the condition
experienced by the contaminant receptor.

Risk.   The expected frequency or probability of undesirable effects resulting from exposure
to known or expected stressors.

Risk Characterization.  A phase of ecological risk assessment that integrates the results of
the exposure and ecological effects  analyses to evaluate the likelihood of adverse ecological
effects associated with  exposure to the  stressor.  The ecological significance of the adverse
effects is discussed, including consideration of the types and magnitudes of the effects, their
spatial and temporal  patterns, and the likelihood of recovery.

Sample.   Fraction of a material tested or analyzed; a selection or collection from a larger
collection.

Scientific/Management Decision Point (SMDP).  A point during the risk assessment process
when the risk assessor communicates results of the assessment at that stage to a risk manager.
At this point the risk manager determines whether the information is sufficient to arrive at a
decision regarding risk  management strategies  and/or the need for  additional information to
characterize risk.

Sediment.20  Paniculate material  lying below  water.

Sensitive  Life  Stage.  The  life stage (i.e., juvenile, adult, etc.) that exhibits the highest degree
of sensitivity (i.e., effects are evident at a lower exposure concentration) to a contaminant in
toxiciry tests.

Species.13  A  group of organisms that actually or potentially  interbreed  and are reproducuvely
isolated from all other such groups; a taxonomic grouping of morphologically similar
individuals; the category below genus.

Statistic.10  A computed or estimated statistical quantity such as the mean, the standard
deviation, or the correlation coefficient.

Stressor.6 Any physical, chemical, or  biological entity that can induce an adverse  response.
                                                                        GLOSSARY, Page 9

-------
 August 21.  1996	DRAFT

 SublethaJ5 Below the concentration that directly causes death.  Exposure to sublethaJ
 concentrations of a  substance can produce  less obvious effects on behavior. biocherrucaJ
 andyor ph>siologicaJ functions,  and the structure of cells and tissues in organisms.

 Threshold Concentration.5  A concentration above whjch  some effect (or response) wiiJ be
 produced and below which it will not.

 Toxicity Assessment.  Review  of literature, results in toxicity tests, and data from field
 surveys regarding the toxicity of any given material to an appropriate receptor.

 Toxicity Test.5  The means by  which the toxicity  of a chemical or other test material  is
 determined. A toxicity test is used  to measure the degree of response  produced by exposure
 to a specific level of stimulus (or concentration of chemical).

 Toxicity Value." A numerical  expression of a substance's exposure-response relationship that
 is used in nsk assessments.

 Toxin.  A poisonous substance.

Trophic Level.   A functional classification of taxa within a community that is based on
 feeding  relationships (e.g., aquatic and terrestrial plants make up the first trophic  level,  and
herbivores make up the second).

Type I Error.    Rejection of a true null hypothesis (see also Appendix D).

Type II Error.10 Acceptance of a  false  null hypothesis (see also Appendix D).

 Uptake.-  A process by which materials are transferred into or onto an organism.

 Uncertainty.1'   Imperfect knowlcuge concerning the present or future  state of the system
 under consideration,  a component of risk resulting  from imperfect knowledge of the degree of
 hazard or of its spatial  and temporal distribution.

 Volatilization.14  The conversion of a chemical substance from a liquid or solid state to a
 gaseous vapor state.

 Xenobiotic.6 A chemical or other stressor that does not occur naturally  in the  environment
 Xenobioucs occur as a result of anthropogenic activities such as the application of  pesticides
 and the discharge of industnal chemicals to air, land, or water.
GLOSSARY, Page 10

-------
 August 21. 1996	^	DRAFT

 ENDNOTES

 1 Krebs  1978, 2 U.S. EPA 1989, 3 CaJow 1993. 4 Freedman 1989, 5 Rand and Petrocelli
 1985,   U.S. EPA 1992a, 7 Pucklefs 1990, 8 U.S. EPA 1992b, 9 ASTM 1993a, 10 Sokal and
 Rohlf  1981, n  Suter 1993, 12 Wallace et aJ. 1981, 13 Curtis 1983. 14 Parker 1994, 15 Sullivan
 1993, 16 U.S. EPA 1990, 17 Zar  1984, 18 Keith 1988, 19 Gilbert 1987, 20 ASTM 1993b, 21
 Huggett et al. 1992, 22 Stedman  1995.


 REFERENCES

 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1993a.  ASTM Standard E 943.
       Standard terminology relating to biological effects and environmental fate.

 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1993b.  ASTM Standard E 1525.
       Standard guide for designing biological tests with sediments.

 Calow,  P (ed.).   1993. Handbook of Ecotoxicology. Volume 1.  Boston, MA:  Blackwell
       Publishing.

 Curtis, H.  1983. Biology, Fourth Edition.  New York, NY: Worth.

 Freedman. B.  1989. Environmental Ecology.  The Impacts of Pollution and Other Stresses
       on Ecosystem Structure and  Function.  New York, NY:  Academic Press.

 Gilbert, R.O.  1987.  Statistical Methods for Environmental Pollution Monitoring. New York,
       NY: Reinhold.

 Keith, L.H. (ed.).  1988.  Principles of Environmental Sampling.  American Chemical Society.

 Krebs, C.J.  1978. Ecology:  The experimental analysis of distribution and abundance.
       Second edition.  New York,  NY: Harper & Row.

 Huggett, R.J.;  Kimerle, R.A.;  Nehrle,  P.M. Jr.; Bergman, H.L. (cds.).  1992.  Biomarkers:
       Biochemical, Physiological,  and Histoloqical Markers of Anthropogenic Stress.  A
       Special Publication of SETAC. Chelsea, MI:  Lewis Publishers.

 Parker,  S.P. (ed.).  1994.  Dictionary of Scientific and Technical Terms.  Fifth Edition. New
       York, NY: McGraw-Hill.

"Rand, G.M.; Petrocelli, S.R,  1985.  Fundamentals of Aquatic Toxicology. Methods and
       Applications. New York, NY:  McGraw Hill.

                                                                   GLOSSARY, Page 11

-------
 August II. !996	DRAFT

 Ricklefs. R.E.  1990.  Ecology.  Second Edition. New York. NY:  W.H. Freeman.

 Sokal. R.R.. RohJf. F J  1981  Biometr.. Second Edmon.  New York. NY:  W.H. Freeman.

 Stedman. T L.  1995.  Stedman's Medical Dictionary: 26th Edition. Baltimore,  MD:
       Williams and Wilkins.

 Sullivan, T F P   1993.  Environmental Regulatory Glossary.  Government Institutes. Inc.

 Surer. G.W  EL  1993.  Ecological Risk Assessment.  Ann Arbor, MI.  Lewis.

 U. S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA). 1989.  Risk Assessment Guidance for
       Superfund: Volume 1 • Human Health.  Washington,  DC: Office of Emergency and
       Remedial Response; EPA/540/1-89/002.

U. S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA). 1990. Macroinvertebratc Field and
       Laboratory Methods for Evaluating the Biological Integrity of Surface Waters.
       Washington. DC:  Office of Water;  EPA/600/4-90/030.

U. S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA). 1992a.  Framework for Ecological Risk
       Assessment.  Washington, DC:  Risk Assessment Forum; EP.V630/R-02/011.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).   1992b.  Sediment  Classification Methods
       Compendium.  Washington, DC:  Office of Water; EPA7823/R-092/006.

Wallace, R.A.. King. J.L.; Sanders, G.P  199x.  Biology.  The Science of Life. Second
       Edition  IL.  Scon, Foresman & Co.

Zar,  J.H.  1984  Biostanstical Anal\sis.  Princeton,  NJ:  Prentice-Hail.
GLOSSARY, Page  12

-------
August II. 1996	                                                      DRAFT

                                 BIBLIOGRAPHY

       This combined reference list and bibliography is intended to provide a broad, but not
all inclusive, list of other materials that may provide useful information for ecological  risk
assessments at Superfund sites.  These documents include other Superfund Program guidance
documents, standard guides for toxicity testing, other EPA program office references with
potential applications at Superfund sites, and other ecological nsk assessment  reference
materials. References cited in the text are marked with an asterisk (*).

American Public Health Association (APHA).  1989.  Standard Methods for Examination
       of Water and Wastewater, 17th edition.  Washington, DC:  APHA.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1994a.  Annual Book of ASTM
       Standards.  Philadelphia, PA:  ASTM.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1994b.  Standard guide for conducting
       sediment toxicity  tests with freshwater invertebrates:  ASTM Standard  E 1383-94.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1993a.  Standard terminology relating
       to biological effects and environmental fate:   ASTM Standard E 943-93.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  I993b.  Standard guide for designing
       biological tests with sediments:  ASTM  Standard E 1525-93.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1993. ASTM Standards of
       Aquatic Toxicology and Hazard Evaluation.  Philadelphia, PA:  ASTM.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1992. Standard guide  for
       conducting sediment toxicity tests with freshwater invertebrates: ASTM
       Standard E  1383-92.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1992. Standard guide  for
       conducting  10-day static sediment toxicity tests with manne and estuanne
       amphipods: ASTM Standard E  1367-92.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1990. Standard guide  for
       collection, storage, characterization, and manipulation of sediments for
       tcxicological testing:  ASTM Standard E 1391-90.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1988.  Standard guide for
       conducting early life-stage toxicity tests with fishes:  ASTM Standard E
       1241-88.

                                                                BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 1

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1984.  Standard Practice for
       conducting bioconcentration tests with fishes and saltwater bivalve mollusks:
       ASTM Standard E 1022-84.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1980.  Practice for conducting
       acute toxiciry tests with fishes, macroinvertebrates, and amphibians:  ASTNf
       Standard E 729-80.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).  1980.  Practice for conducting
       static acute toxiciry tests with  larvae of four species of bivalve moiiusks:
       ASTM Standard E 724-80.

•Anderson and Hickey.  1972. [reserved]

Ankley, G.T.; Thomas, N.A.;  Di Toro, D.M.; et al.  1994. Assessing potential bioavailability
       of metals in sediments: a proposed approach. Environ. Manage. 18:  331-337.

•Aulerich, R.J.; Ringer, R.K.  1977.  Current status of PCB  toxicity to mink and effect on
       their young.  Arch. Environ. Contam. Toxicol. 6:  279-292.

Bamhouse, L.W.; Suter, G.W.; Barteil, S.M.; et al.  1986. User's Manual for Ecological Risk
       Assessment.  Oak Ridge, TN:  Oak Rjdge National Laboratory, Environmental
       Sciences Division  Publication No. 2679.

Barteil. S.M.: Gardner, R.H.; O'Neill, R.V   1992.  Ecological Risk Estimation.  New
       York, NY:  Lewis Publishers.

Baudo, R.; Giesy,  J.P.; Muntau, H.  1990.  Sediments: Chemistry ind Toxiciry of In-place
       Pollutants.  Ann Arbor, MI: Lewis Publishers.

Beyer, W.N.;  Heinz, G.H.; Redmon-Norwood, A.R. (eds.).  1996.   Environmental
       Contaminants in Wildlife:  Interpreting Tissue Concentrations.  A  Special Publication
       of the  Society of Environmental Toxicology and Chemise-/ ;SETAC), La Point, T.W.
       (senes edj.  Boca Raton, FL:  CRC Press, Inc., Lewis  Publishers.

Burton, G.A., Jr.  ted.).  1992. Sediment  Toxiciry Assessment.  Ann Arbor, MI:  Lewis
       Publishers.

•Butler.  19" 1. [reserved]

Cairns, J. Jr . Niederlehner, B.R.   1995.  Ecological Toxiciry Testing:  Scale, Complexity, and
       Relevance.  Boca  Raton, FL:  CRC Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.

BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 2

-------
August 21. 1996	   	DRAFT

Calabrese, E.J.; Baldwin, L.A.  1993. Performing Ecological Risk Assessments.
       New York, NY:  Lewis Publishers.

Carter. M.R. (ed.).  1993.  Soil Sampling and Methods of Analysis.  Boca Raton, FL:  CRC
       Press, Inc.. Lewis Publishers.

"Chapman et al.  1992.  [reserved]

*Colborn, T.I.  1991.  Epidemiology of Great Lakes bald eagles.  J. Environ. Health Toxicol.
       4:  395^53.

Calow, P. (ed.).  1993.  Handbook of Ecotoxicology, Volume 1.  Boston, MA:  Blackwell
       Publishers.
         V

Cochran, W.G.  1977. Sampling Techniques. 3rd ed.  New York, NY: John Wiley and
       Sons, Inc.

Cochran, W.G.; Cox, G.M.  1957.  Experimental Design.  New York, NY: Wiley.

Cockerham. L.G.; Shane, B.S. (eds.).  1994.  Basic Environmental Toxicology.  Boca Raton,
       FL:  CRC  Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.

*Cooke, A.S.  1971.  Selective predation  by  newts on frog tadpoles treated with DDT.
       Nature 229:  275-276.

Cowardin, L.M.; Carter,  V.; Golet, F.C.; LaRoe, E.T. 1979. Classification of Wetlands
       and Deepwater Habitats of the United States.  Washington. DC: U.S. Fish and
       Wildlife Service;  FWS/OBS-79/31.

Crawley, M.J.   1993. GUM for Lcologists.  Oxford, UK:  Blackwell Scientific Publications.

Curtis, H. 1983.  Biology; Fourth Edition.  New York, NY: Worth.

Daniel, W.W.  1990. Applied Nonparamemc Statistics.  Boston,  MA:  PWS-KENT
       Publishing Company.

Davis, W.S.; Simon, T.P.  1995. Biological Assessment and Criteria:  Tools for Water
       Resource Planning and Decision Making.  Boca Raton, FL:  CRC Press, Inc.,
       Lewis Publishers.

Diggie, P.J.  1990.  Time Series:  A Biosatistical Introduction.  Oxford Statistical Science
       Senes No. 5.  Oxford, UK:  Clarendon Press.

                                                                BIBLIOGRAPHY. Page 3

-------
 August ::. 1996	DRAFT

 •Dilworth et aJ.  1972. [reserved]

 *Dourson. M.L., Stara, J.F   1983.  Regulatory hjstory and experimental support of
       uncertajnry (safety) factors.  Reg. Toxicol. Pharmacol. 3.  224-238.

 Finney, DJ   1964.  Statistical Method in Biological Assay.  London. UK: Charles Griffin
       and Company.

 Finney. D.J.   1970.  Probit Analysis: A Statistical Treatment of the Sigmoid Response Curve.
       Cambridge, UK:  Cambridge University Press.

 *Foley, R.E.;  Jackling, S.J.; Sloan, R.J. et al.   1988. Organochionne and  mercury residues in
       wild rruak and otter:  comparison  with fish.  Environ. Toxicol. Chem. 7:  363-374.

Freedman, B.   1989.  Environmental Ecology.  The Impacts of Pollution and Other Stresses
       on Ecosystem Structure and Function.   New York. NY: Academic Press.

*Fnberg et al.  1986.  [reserved]

"Fuller and Hobson.  1986.  [reserved]

•Geller, M.D.  1979. Dynamics of three  populations of Microtus pennsylvanicus in the
       Northwestern United States.  PhD Thesis.  Binghamton, NY:  State University of New
       York.

Gilbert, R.O.  1987. Statistical Methods for Environmental Pollution Monitoring. New York,
       NY: Reinhold.

Green, R.H.  1979.  Sampling Design  and Statistical Methods for Environmental Biologists.
       New York, NY: Wiley.

Hamelink. J L.; Landrum, P.F.; Bergman, H.L.; Benson, W.H. fcdsi  1994.  Unavailability:
       Physical,  Chemical, and Biological Interactions.  Boca Ratcn. FL:  CRC Press,  Inc.,
       Lewis  Publishers.

 Hill. I.R.; Matihiessen, P.; Heimbach,  F. (eds.j. 1993. Guidance Document on Sediment
       Toxiciry Tests and Bioassays for Freshwater and Marine Environments.  From the
       Workshop on Sediment Toxiciry Assessment, Renesse, The Netherlands, November 8-
       10. 1993.  Society of Environmental Toxicology and Chemistry - Europe.

 "Hill, A.B.  1965.  The environment and disease:  Association or causation? Proceed.  Royal
       Soc. Med. 58:  285-300.


 BIBLIOGRAPHY. Page 4

-------
August:!. 1996	DRAFT

Hoffman,  D.J.; Rattner, B.A.; Burton. G.A. Jr.; Cairns, J., Jr. (eds.).  1995.  Handbook of
       Ecotoxicology. Ann .Arbor, MI: CRC Press,  Inc., Lewis Publishers.

Howard, P.H.; Jarvis, W.F.; Meyland, W.M.; Michalenko, E.M. 1991.  Handbook of
       Environmental Degradation Rates.  Boca Raton, FL:  CRC Press, Inc., Lewis
       Publishers.

Hugget, R.J.; Kimerle, R.A.; Mehrle, P.M., Jr.; Bergman, H.L.  1992.  Biomarkers:
       Biochemical, Physiological, and Histological Markers of Anthropogenic Stress.  A
       Special Publication of the Society of Environmental Toxicology and Chemistry
       (SETAC), Ward, C.H.; Walton, B.T; La Point, T.W. (senes eds.). Boca Raton, FL:
       CRC Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.

Kabata-Pendias, A.; Pendias H.  1984.  Trace Elements in Soils and Plants.  Boca Raton, FL:
       CRC Press, Inc.

Keith, L.H. (ed.).  1996.   EPA s Sampling and Analysis Methods Database; Version 2.0.
       Boca Raton, FL:  CRC Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.

Keith, L.H. (ed.).   1988.   Principles of Environmental Sampling.  American Chemical
       Society.

Kendall, R.J.; Lacher, I.E. (eds.).  1994.  Wildlife Toxicology and Population Modeling:
       Integrated Studies  ofAgrotcosystems. A Special Publication of the Society of
       Environmental Toxicology  and Chemistry (SETAC), La Point, T.W. (series ed.).  Boca
       Raton, FL:  CRC Press, Inc., Lewis  Publishers.

*Klemm. D.J.; Lewis. P.A.; Fulk, F.; Lazorchak, J.M.  1990. Macro invertebrate Field and
       Laboratory  Methods for Evaluating  the Biological Integrity of Surface Waters.
       Washington, DC:   U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  EPA/600/4-90/030.

Kraus,  M.L.   1989.  Bioaccumulation of heavy  metals in pre-fledglmg tree swallows,
       Tachycimeta bicolor.  Environ. Contam. Toxicol. 43:  407-414.

Krebs,  C.J.  1978.  Ecology: The  Experimental Analysis of Distribution and Abundance;
       Second Edition.  New York, NY:  Harper & Row.

*Krebs, C.J.; Valiela, I.; Harvey, G.R.; Teal. J.M.  1974.  Reduction of field populations
       of fiddler crabs by uptake of chlorinated hydrocarbons.  Mar. Pollut. Bull. 5:
       140-142.
                                                                 BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 5

-------
 August 21  1^(3	DRAFT

 Landis, WG.; Yu, M.  1995.  Introduction to Environmental Toxicology:  Impacts of
       Chemicals upon Ecological Systems.  Boca Raton. FL:  CRC Press, Inc., Lewis
       Publishers.

 Landis. W G.; Hughes, J.S.; Lewis, M.A. (eds.).  1993.  Environmental Toxicity and Risk
       Assessment.   Philadelphia. PA: American Society for Testing and Materials.

 •Long, E.R.;  Chapman, P.M.  1985.  A sediment quality tnad:  measures of sediment
       contamination, toxicity, and infaunaJ community composition in Puget Sound.
       Mar. Pollut. Bull.  16:  405-415.

 Lyon, J.G.  1993.  Practical Handbook for Wetland Identification and Delineation.  Boca
       Raton, FL: CRC Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.

Manahan, S.   1994.  Environmental Chemistry; Sixth Edition.  Boca Raton, FL:  CRC Press,
       Inc., Lewis Publishers.

Maughan, J.T. 1993. Ecological Assessment of Hazardous  Waste Sites. New York,
       NY: Van Nostrand Remhold.

"McNamara, B.P  1976.  Concepts in health evaluation of commercial  and industrial
       chemicals.  In:  Mehiman, M.A.; et al. (eds.). Advances in Modern Toxicology, Volume
       /, Part 1: New Concepts in Safety Evaluation. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons.

*McNamara.  1971.  [reserved]

Mead, R.  1988.  The Design of Experiments.  Cambridge, UK:  Cambridge University Press.

'Melacon and  Lech.   1983.  [reserved]

Moltmann. J F . Rombke, J.  1996. Applied Ecotoxicology.  Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press,
       Inc.. Lewis Publishers.

Morgan, B J.   1993.  Analysis of Quantal Response Data. London, UK: Chapman  and Hall.

Mudroch. A.,  Azcue, J.M.  1995.  Manual of Aquatic Sediment Sampling.  Boca Raton, FL:
       CRC Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.

 Mudroch. A;  Mac Knight, S.D.  (eds.).  1994.  Handbook of Techniques for Aquatic Sediment
       Sampling; Second Edjtaon. Boca  Raton, FL:  CRC Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.
BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 6

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

Murdoch, A.; MacKnight, S.D. (eds.).  1991.  CRC Handbook of Techniques for Aquatic
       Sediments Sampling. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press

National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).  1987,  Guidelines and
       Recommendations for Using Bioassessment in the Superfund Remedial Process.
       Seattle, WA: Ocean Assessments Division. Prepared by Chnstopherson, S.,
       and Field, L.J., National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, and Dexter,
       R.N., E.V S. Consultants.

•National Research Council (NRC).   1994.  Science and Judgment in Risk Assessment.
       Washington, DC:  National Academy Press.

'National Research Council (NRC).   1993.  Issues in Risk Assessment.  Washington, DC:
       National Academy Press.

'National Research Council (NRC).   1983.  Risk Assessment in  the Federal Government:
       Managing the Process.  Washington, DC:  National Academy  Press.

*Nebeker, A.V.; Cairns, M.A.; Wise,  C.M.  1984.  Relative sensitivity of Chironomus tetans
       life stages to copper. Environ. Toxicology and Chemistry  3:  151-158.

Neilson, A.H.  1994.  Organic Chemicals in the Aquatic Environment:  Distribution,
       Persistence,  and Toxicity.   Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press, Inc.,  Lewis Publishers.

Newman, M.C.  1995.  Quantitative Methods in Aquatic Ecotoxicology. Boca Raton, FL:
       CRC  Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.

Newman, M.C.; Mclntosh, A.W. (eds.). 1991. Metal Ecotoxicoiogy:  Concepts and
       Applications. Boca Raton, FL:  CRC Press, Inc., Lewis  Publishers.

Oak Rkige National Laboratory (ORNL).  1994.  Manual for PC-Data Base Screening
       Benchmarks for Ecological Risk Assessment. Environmental Sciences Division, Health
       Sciences Research Division. Prepared by Martin Marietta Energy Systems, Inc., for
       the U.S. Department of Energy.  ORNL/TM-12898.

Oak Ridge National Laboratory (ORNL).  1994.   Toxicological Benchmarks for Screening
       Contaminants of Potential  Concern for Effects on Sediment-Associated Biota:  1994
       Revision.  Prepared by Hull, R.N.;  Suter,  G.W.,  El; Energy Systems Environmental
       Restoration Program, ORNL Environmental Restoration  Program (managed by  Martin
       Marietta Energy Systems, Inc., for the U.S. Department  of Energy).  ES/ER/TM-
       95/R1.
                                                               BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 7

-------
August 21. 1996	                    DRAFT

Oak Rjdge National Laboratory (ORNL).  1994. Toxicological Benchmarks for Screening
       Potential Contaminants of Concern for Effects on Aquatic Biota:  1994 Revision.
       Prepared by Suter, G.W . II. Mabrey, J.B.; ORNL EnvironmentaJ Sciences Division,
       for the  U.S. Department of Energy.  ES/ER/TM-96/R1.

Oak Ridge National Laboratory (ORNL).  1994. Toxicological Benchmarks for Wildlife:
       1994 Revision. Prepared by Opresko,  D. M., Sample, B., E., and Suter, G. W. n,
       ORNL  EnvironmentaJ Sciences Division, for the U.S. Department of Energy.
       ES/ER/TM-86/R1.

Oak Ridge National Laboratory (ORNL).  1994.  Toxicological Benchmarks for Screening
       Potential Contaminants of Concern for Effects on Terrestrial Plants: 1994 Revision.
       Prepared by Will, M. E., and Suter, G. W. n, ORNL Environmental Sciences  Division,
       for the  U.S. Department of Energy.  ES/ER/TM-85/R1.

Ostrander, G. (ed.).  1996.  Handbook of Aquatic Toxicology Methods.  Boca Raton, FL:
       CRC  Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.

Ott, W.R.  1995.  Environmental Statistics and Data Analysis. Boca Raton, FL:  CRC Press,
       Inc., Lewis Publishers.

Pain, D.J.  1995.  Lead in the environment. In:  Handbook of Ecotoxicology.  pp 356-391.

Parker, S.P. (ed.).  1994. Dictionary of Scientific and Technical Terms;  Fifth Edition.  New
       York. NY:  McGraw-Hill.

*Pascoe, D.; Williams, K.A.; Green, D.W.J.  1989.  Chronic toxicity of cadmium to
       Chironomus ripanous Meigen  effects upon larval develecment and adult emergence.
       Hydrobiologia  175:  109-115.

•Peakall.  1975. [reserved]

'Phillips. D H.  1978. The use of biological indicator organisms fo quantitate
       organochlorine pollutants in aquatic environments - a review  Environ. Pollut.
       16:  167-227.

'Phillips, D H. 1977. The use of biological indicator organisms to monitor trace metal
       pollution in marine and estuarine environments - a review   Environ. Pollut.
       13.  281-317
BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 8

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

Ramamoorthy, S.; Baddaloo, E.G.  1995. Handbook of Chemical Toxicity Profiles of
       Biological Species;  Volume 1:  Aquatic Species.  Boca Raton, FL:  CRC Press, Inc.,
       Lewis Publishers.

Rand, G.M.; Petrocelli. S.R.  1985.  Fundamentals of Aquatic Toxicology.  Methods and
       Applications.  New  York, NY:  McGraw Hill.

Renzoni, A.; Fossi, M.C.; Lan, L; Mattel, N. (eds.). 1994.  Contaminants in the
       Environment.  A Multidisciplinary Assessment of Risks to Man and Other Organisms.
       Boca Raton, FL:  CRC Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.

Ricklefs, R.E.  1990.  Ecology; Second Edition. New York, NY:  W.H. Freeman.

Siegel, S.  1956. Non-parametric Statistics.  New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.

Sokal, R.R.; Rohlf, F.J.  1981.  Biometry.  Second Edition.  New York, NY:   W.H.
       Freeman.

Sullivan, T.F.  1993.  Environmental Regulatory Glossary.  Government Institutes, Inc.

Suter, G.W., EL  1993.  Ecological Risk Assessment.  Ann Arbor, MI: Lewis  Publishers.

*Tanabe.  1988.  [reserved]

Talmage, S.S.; Walton, B.T.  1991.  Small mammals as  monitors of environmental
       contaminants.  Reviews of Environmental Contamination and  Toxicology  119:  95.

Trapp,  S.: McFarlane, J.C.  (eds.).  1995.  Plant Contamination:  Modeling and Simulation of
       Organic Chemical Processes.  Boca Raton, FL:   CRC Press. Inc., Lewis Publishers.

U.S.  Department of the Interior (U.S. DOI).  1991.  Plant toxicity  testing with sediment and
       marsh soils. Technical Report NPS/NRWRD/NRTR-91/03.

U.S.  Department of the Interior (U.S. DOD.  1987.  Guidance on Use of Habitat Evaluation
       Procedures and Suitability Index Models for CERCLA Application. Washington, DC:
       U.S. Fish and  Wildlife Service, National Ecology Center, PB86-100151.

*U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency (U S. EPA).  1996a. Ecotox Thresholds.  ECO
       Update, Intermittent Bulletin, Volume 3, Number 2.  Washington, DC:  Office of
       Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Site Evaluation Division; Publication
       9345.0-12FSI; EPA/540/F-95/038; NTTS PB95-963324.
                                                               BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 9

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1996b.  Proposed Guidelines for
       Carcinogen Risk Assessment.  Washington, DC:  Office of Research and Development,
       April.  EPA/600/P-92/003C.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1996c.  Representative Sampling
       Guidance Document,  Volume 3; Ecological.  Washington, DC:  Office of Emergency
       and Remedial Response.

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1995a.  Great Lakes Water Quality
       Initiative Criteria Documents for the Protection of Wildlife. Washington, DC:  Office
       of Water. EPA/820/B-95/008.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).   1995b.  Ecological Significance and
       Selection of Candidate Assessment Endpoints. ECO Update, Intermittent Bulletin,
       Volume 3, Number 1.   Washington, DC: Office of Emergency and Remedial
       Response, Hazardous  Site Evaluation Division;  Publication 9345.0-11FSI; EPA/540/F-
       95/037; NTIS PB95-963323.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1995c.  Land Use in the CERCLA
       Remedy Selection Process.  May 25 Memorandum from Elliot P. Laws, Assistant
       Administrator, to EPA Regional staff.  OSWER Directive No. 9355:7-04.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1995d.  Great Lakes Water Quality
       Initiative  Technical Support Document for the Procedure to Determine
       Bioaccumulation Factors. Washington, DC:  Office of Water; EPA/820/B-95/005.

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1995e.  Great Lakes Water Quality
       Initiative  Criteria Documents for the Protection of Aquatic Life in Ambient Water.
       Washington.  DC: Office of Water; EPA/820/B-95/004.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1995f.  EPA Risk Characterization
       Policy. March 21 Memorandum from  Carol Browner, Administrator, to EPA  staff.
       Washington.  DC:  Office of the Administrator.

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).   1995g.  Technical Support Document
      for the Hazardous Waste Identification, Rule: Risk Assessment for Human and
       Ecological Receptors,  Volume I.  Washington, DC:  Prepared for the Office of Sold
       Waste  under Contract No. 68-D2-0065, 68-W3-0028; August.
BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page  10

-------
August 21. 1996	                 DRAFT

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1995h. Technical Support Document
      for the Hazardous Waste Identification Rule:  Risk Assessment for Human and
       Ecological Receptors, Volume II.  Washington, DC:  Prepared for the Office of Sold
       Waste under Contract No. 68-D2-0065, 68-W3-0028; August.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1995.  Ecological Risk: A Primer for
       Risk Managers.  Washington, DC:  EPA/734/R-95/001.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1995.  Draft Science Policy Council
       Statement on EPA Policy: Cumulative Risk Framework,  With a Focus on Improved
       Characterization of Risks for Multiple Endpoints, Pathways, Sources, and Stressors.
       Washington, DC:  Science Policy Council.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA). 1994a.  Memorandum from Carol
       Browner, Administrator, to Assistant Administrators concerning "Toward a Place-
       Driven Approach:  The Edgewater Concensus on an EPA Stategy for Ecosystem
       Protection.    May 24.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA). 1994b.  Using Toxicity Tests in
       Ecological Risk Assessment.  ECO Update,  Intermittent Bulletin,  Volume 2, Number I.
      Washington, DC:  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Site
      Evaluation Division; Publication 9345.0-051; EPA/540/F-94/012;  NTIS PB94-963303.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA). 1994c.  Catalogue of Standard Toxicity
       Tests for Ecological Risk Assessment. ECO Update, Intermittent Bulletin, Volume 2,
      Number 2.  Washington, DC:  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response,
      Hazardous  Site Evaluation Division; Publication 8345.0-051; EPA/540/F-94/013; NTIS
      PB94-963304.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA). 1994d.  Field Studies for Ecological
      Risk Assessment.  ECO Update, Intermittent Bulletin, Volume 2, Number 3.
      Washington, DC:  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Site
       Evaluation Division; Publ. 9345.0-051; EPA/540/F-94/014,  NTTS PB94-963305.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1994e.  Selecting  and Using Reference
       Information in Superfund Ecological Risk Assessments. ECO Update, Intermittent
      Bulletin,  Volume 2, Number 4.  Washington, DC:  Office of Emergency and Remedial
       Response, Hazardous Site  Evaluation Division; Publication 9345.101; EPA/540/F-
      94/050; NTTS PB94-963319.
                                                              BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 11

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1994f.  Guidance for the Data Quality
       Objectives Process; EPA QA/G-4.  Washington, DC: Quality Assurance Management
       Staff: Final. September.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1994g.  Establishing Background
       U\els.  Quick Reference Fact Sheet.  Washington, EXT: Office  of Solid Waste and
       Emergency Response.  OSWER Directive 9285.7-F9FS. Publication PB94-963313;
       EPA/540/F-94/030.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1994h.  Peer Review Workshop Report
       on Ecological Risk Assessment Issue Papers. Washington, DC:  Office of Research
       and Development, Risk Assessment Forum;  EPA/630/R-94/008.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  19941.  A Review of Ecological
       Assessment Case Studies from a Risk Assessment Perspective,  Volume II.  Washington,
       DC:  Office of Research and  Development, Risk Assessment Forum; EPA/630/R-
       94/003.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1994J.  Ecological  Risk Assessment Issue
       Papers.  Washington, DC:  Office of Research and Development, Risk Assessment
       Forum; EPA/630/R-94/009.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1994.  Methods for Measuring the
       Toxiciry and Bioaccumulation of Sediment-associated Contaminants with Freshwater
       Invertebrates. Washington, DC: Office of Research  and Development.  EPA
       600/R-94/024.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S  EPA).  1994.  Methods for Measuring the
       Toxiciry of Sediment Toxiciry  of Sediment-associated Contaminants with Estuarme  and
       \ianne Amphipods.  Washington, DC.   Office of Research and Development. EPA
       600/R-94/025.

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993a.  Wildlife Exposure Factors
       Handbook Volume I.  Washington,  DC: Office of R-search and  Development;
       EPA/60Q/R-93/187a.

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993b.  Wildlife Exposure Factors
       Handbook Volume II:  Appendix.  Washington, DC:  Office of Research and
       Development; EPA/600/R-93/187b.
BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 12

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993c.  Data Quality Objectives
       Process for Superfund. Washington, DC:  Office of Emergency and Remedial
       Response;  Interim Final Guidance; EPA/540/G-93/071.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993d.  Data Quality Objectives
       Process for Superfund. Workbook.  Washington, DC;  Office of Emergency
       and Remedial Response; EPA/540/R-93/078.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993e.  Wildlife Criteria Portions of the
       Proposed Water Quality Guidance for the Great Lakes System.  Washington, DC:
       Office of Water, EPA/822/R-93/006.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993f. Guidance for Planning for
       Data  Collection in Support of Environmental Decision Making Using the Data
       Quality Objectives Process.  Interim Final.  Quality Assurance Management
       Staff; EPA QA/G^.

U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993. A Review of Ecological
       Assessment Case Studies from a Risk Assessment Perspective.  Washington,
       DC:   Risk Assessment Forum; EPA/630/R-92/005.

U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993.  Technical Basis for Deriving
       Sediment Quality Criteria for Nonionic Organic Contaminants for the
       Protection of Benthic Organisms by Using Equilibrium Partitioning.
       Washington, DC:  Office of Water;  EPA/822/R-93/011.

U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993.  Guidelines for Deriving Site-
       Specific Sediment Quality Criteria for the Protection of Benthic Organisms.
       Washington. DC:  Office of Water;  EPA/822/R-93/017.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992a. Framework for  Ecological Risk
       Assessment. Washington, DC:  Risk Assessment Forum; EPA/630/R-92/001.

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992b.  Developing a Work Scope for
       Ecological Assessments. ECO Update, Intermittent Bulletin, Volume I, Number 4.
       Washington, DC: Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Site
       Evaluation Division; Publ. 9345.0-051.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992c.  The Role of Natural Resource
       Trustees in the Superfund Process.  ECO Update,  Intermittent Bulletin, Volume 1.
       Number 3. Washington, DC:  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response,
       Hazardous Site Evaluation Division; Publ. 9345.0-051.

                                                              BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 13

-------
August 21. 1996	    	DRAFT

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992d.  Briefing the BTAG:  Intitial
       Description of Semng, History, and Ecology of a Site.  ECO Update, Intermittent
       Bullenn,  Volume 1. Number 5. Washington, EXT:  Office  of Emergency and Remedial
       Response, Hazardous Site Evaluation Division; Publ. 9345.0-051.

'U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992e.  Draft Report:  A Cross-species
       Scaling Factor for Carcinogen Risk Assessment Based on Equivalence of mg/kg*3/4
       per day;  Notice.  Federal Register.  57(109): 24152-24173 (June 5).

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S.  EPA).  1992f.   Guidance on Risk
       Characterization for Risk Managers and Risk Assessors.  February 26 Memorandum
       from F Henry Habicht  II, Deputy Administrator,  to EPA Assistant Administrators and
       Regional Administrators. Washington,  DC:  Office of the Deputy Administrator.

U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992. Sediment Classification Methods
       Compendium.  Washington, DC: Office of Water; EPA/823/R-092/006.

U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992. Superfund Ecological
       Assessment Process Case Studies.  Washington, DC: Office of Emergency and
       Remedial Response,  Hazardous Site Evaluation Division,  Toxics Integration
       Branch.  Prepared by The Cadmus  Group,  Incorporated.

U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992. Peer Review Workshop
       Report on a Framework for Ecological Risk Assessment.  Washington, DC:
       Rask Assessment Forum; EPA/625/3-91/022.

U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992. Report on the Ecological Risk
       Assessment Guidelines Strategic Planning Workshop.  Washington, DC:  Risk
       Assessment Forum; EPA7630/R-92/002.

U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992. Guidelines for Exposure
       .Assessment.  Federal  Register.  57:  22888-22938 (May 29).

U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992. Dermal Exposure -  Principles
       and Applications;  Final; Washington, DC:  Office of Health and Environmental
       Assessment; EPA/600/8-91/01 IB.

U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992. Science Advisory Board's
       Review- of the Draft  Final Exposure Assessment Guidelines (SAB Final  Review
       Draft,  August  1991). Washington, DC: Science  Advisory  Board;
       EPA/SAB/lAQC-92/015.
BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 14

-------
August 21. 1996    	DRAFT

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1992.  Interim Guidance on the
       Interpretation and Implementation of Aquatic Life Criteria for Metals.
       Washington, DC:  Office of Water, Office of Science and Technology, Health
       and Ecological Criteria Division.

"U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991a. .Risk Assessment Guidance
      for Superfund: Volume I • Human Health Evaluation Manual (Part B,
       Development of Risk-Based Preliminary Remediation Goals),  Interim.
       Washington, DC;  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response; 9285.7-0IB.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  199lb. Risk Assessment Guidance for
       Superfund:  Volume I • Human Health Evaluation Manual (Part C, Risk Evaluation of
       Remedial Alternatives), Interim.  Washington, DC:  Office of Emergency and
       Remedial Response; 9285.7-01C.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991c. Ecological Assessment of
       Superfund Sites: An Overview.  ECO Update,  Intermittent Bulletin,  Volume I, Number
       2.  Washington, DC:  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Site
       Evaluation  Division; Publ. 9345.0-051.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  199Id. The Role of BTAGs in
       Ecological Assessment. ECO Update, Intermittent Bulletin, Volume  I, Number I.
       Washington,  DC:  Office  of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Site
       Evaluation  Division; Publ. 9345.0-051.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA). 1991. Guidance on Oversight of
       Potentially  Responsible Party Remedial Investigations and Feasibility Studies, Volume
       1.  Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, Washington, DC.  OSWER
       Directive 9835.l(c).  EPA/540/G-91/OlOa.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA). 1991. Guidance on Oversight of
       Potentially  Responsible Party Remedial Investigations and Feasibility Studies, Volume
       2, Appendices.  Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, Washington, DC.
       OSWER Directive 9835.l(c).  EPA/540/G-91/010b.

U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991. Methods for Measuring :he
       Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine
       Organisms; Fourth Edition;  Washington, DC:  Office of Research and
       Development; EPA/600/4-90/027.
                                                              BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 15

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991.  Technical Support Document for
       Water Quality-based Toxics Control.  Washington. DC:  Office of Water; EPA/505/2-
       90/00 1.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991.  Shon-term Methods for
       Esnmaung the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to
       Freshwater Organisms; Third Edition. Washington,  DC: Office of Research
       and Development; EPA/600/4-91/002.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991.  Short-term Methods for
       Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Marine
       and Estuanne  Organisms; Second Edition.  Washington, DC:  Office of
       Research and Development; EPA/600/4-91/003.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991.  Methods for Aquatic Toxicity
       Identification Evaluations: Phase I, Toxicity Characterization Procedures.
       Duluth, MN: Office of Research and Development:  Environmental  Research
       laboratory; EPA/600/6-91/003.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991.  Supplemental methods and
       status reports for short-term saltwater toxicity tests. G. Mormon and G.
       Chapman. ERL contribution No. 1199. Narragansett, RI:  Environmental
       Research Laboratory.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991.  Assessment and Control of
       Bioconcentratable Contaminants in Surface Waters.  June 1989 Draft prepared
       by EPA's National Effluent  Toxicity Assessment Center, Environmental
       Research Laboratory - Duluth.  MN.  Washington, DC: Off.cc of Water
       Regulations and Standards; and Cincinnati,  OH:  Office of Health Effects
       Assessment.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991.  Rote of the Baseline Risk
       Assessment in  Superfund Remedy Selection  Decisions. Don  R.  Clay, Assistant
       Administrator, Office of Solid Waste  and Emergency Response. Washington,
       DC.  Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response Directive 9355.0-30.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991.  Summary Repon on Issues in
       Ecological Risk Assessment.  Washington, DC:  Risk Assessment Forum;
       EPA, 625/3-91/018.
BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 16

-------
August 21. 1996    	                  DRAFT

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991.  Ecological Exposure and
       Effects of Airborne Toxic Chemicals: An Overview.  CorvaJlis, OR:  Office of
       Research and Development, Environmental Research Laboratory; EPA/600/3-
       91/001.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1991.  Technical Support Document
      for Water Quality-based Toxics Control.  Washington, DC.  Office of Water
       Regulations and Standards; EPA/440/4-85/032.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1990a.  Macromvenebrate Field and
       Laboratory Methods for Evaluating the Biological Integrity of Surface Waters.
       Washington, DC:  Office of Water, EPA/600/4-90/030.

U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1990b.  Hazard Ranking System.
       Federal Register.  55:  51625-51662 (Dec 14).

U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1990.  Guidance for Data Useability in
       Risk Assessment.  Washington, DC:  Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response;
       EPA/540/G-90/008.

U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1990.  EPA Oversight of Remedial
       Designs and Remedial Actions Performed by PRPs.  Quick Reference Fact Sheet.
       Washington,  DC: Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Site
      Control Division; Publication 9355.5-01/FS.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1990.  Guidance Manual for Evaluation
       of Laboratories Performing Aquatic Toxicity Tests.  Washington, DC:  Office of
       Research and Development; EP.A/600/4-90/031.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1990.  Biological Criteria, National
       Program Guidance for Surface Waters.  Washington, DC:  Office of Water
       Regulations  and Standards; EPA/440/5-90/004.

U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1990.  Managing Contaminated
       Sediments:  EPA Decision-Making Processes.  Washington, DC:  Sediment
       Oversight Technical Committee; EPA/506/6-90/002.

U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1990.  National guidance: wetlands
       and nonpoint source control programs. Memorandum from Martha G. Prothro,
       Director. Office of Water Regulations and Standards; Washington,  DC:  Office
       of Water (June  18).
                                                               BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 17

-------
August 21. 1996	                    DRAFT

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1990. Water Quality Standards for
       Wetlands-National Guidance.  Washington, DC:  Office of Water Regulations
       and Standards; EPA/440/S-90/011.

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1989a.  Risk Assessment Guidance
      for Superfund:  Volume I   Human Health Evaluation Manual, Interim Final.
       Washington, DC: Office  of Solid  Waste, Office of Emergency and Remedial
       Response: EPA/540/1-89/002.

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1989b.  Risk Assessment Guidance
      for Superfund:  Volume 2  -  Environmental Evaluation Manual, Interim Final.
       Washington. DC: Office  of Solid Waste and Emergency Response;
       EPA/540/1-89/001 A.

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1989c.  Rapid Bioassessment
       Protocols for Use in Streams and Rivers: Benthic Macromvertebraies and
       Fish. Washington, DC: Office of Water; EPA/444/4-89/001  (Authors:
       Plafkin, J.L.; Barbour, M.T.; Porter, K.D.; Gross, S.K.; Hughes, R.M.).

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S.  EPA).  1989. Briefing  Report to the EPA
      Science Advisory Board on the Equilibrium Partitioning Approach to
       Generating Sediment Quality Criteria.  Washington, DC: Office of Water
       Regulations and Standards; EPA/440/5-89/002.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S.  EPA).  1989. Survey of State Water Quality
      Standards for Wetlands.  Washington, DC: Office of Wetlands Protection.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S  EPA).  1989. Report 10 the Sediment
       Criteria Subcommittee: Evaluation of the Apparent Effects Threshold (AET)
      Approach for .Assessing Sediment Quality.  Washington, DC.  Office of the
       Administrator. Science Advisory Board; SAB-EETFC-89-027

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U S.  EPA).  1989. Sediment Classification
       Methods Compendium; Final Draft.  Washington,  DC:  Office of Water,
       Watershed Protection Division (Juno.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S.  EPA).  1989.  Water Quality Criteria to
       Protect Wildlife Resources.  Corvallis. OR:  Office of Research and
       Development, Environmental Research Laboratory; EPA/600/3-89/067
BIBLIOGRAPHY, Pag« 18

-------
August 21. 1996	                                                    DRAFT

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1989.  Ecological Assessment of
       Hazardous Waste Sites: A Field and Laboratory Reference.  Corvallis, OR:
       Office of Research and Development, Environmental Research Laboratory;
       EPA/600/3-89/013.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1989.  Superfund Exposure
       Assessment Manual - Technical Appendix:  Exposure Analysis of Ecological
       Receptors. Athens, GA:  Office of Research and Development, Environmental
       Research Laboratory (December).

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1989.  Protocols for Short-Term Toxicity
       Screening of Hazardous Waste Sites.  Office of Research and Development,
       Environmental Research Laboratory; EPA/600/3-88/029.

U.S.' Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1989.  Scoping Study of the  Effects
       of Soil Contamination on Terrestrial Biota.  Washington, DC:  Office of Toxic
       Substances.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1988a.  Guidance for Conducting
       Remedial Investigations and Feasibility Studies  Under CERCLA. Washington,
       DC:  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response;  OSWER Directive No.
       9355.3-01.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  I988b.  (original human exposure
       factors handbook).

U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency (U.S. EPA).  1988.  Estimating Toxicity of Industrial
       Chemicals to Aquatic Organisms Using Structure Activity Relationships.  Office of
       Toxic Substances, Washington, DC:  EPA/560/6-88/001.

U.S. Environmental Protection  Agcucy (U.S. EPA).  1988.  CERCLA Compliance with Other
       Laws Manual,  Part 1.  Washington,  DC:  Office of Emergency and Remedial
       Response; OSWER Directive 9234.1-01.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1988.  Short-term Methods for
       Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents in Receiving Waters to Marine and
       Estuanne Organisms. Cincinnati, OH:  Office of Research and Development, Office
       of Environmental Monitoring and  Support Laboratory; EPA/600/4-87/0928.
                                                               BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 19

-------
August 21. 1996	                      DRAFT

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1988.  Estimating Toxiciry of
       Industrial Chemicals to Aquatic Organisms Using Structure Activity
       Relationships.  Washington, DC:  Office of Toxic Substances;  EPA/560/6-
       88/001.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1988.  Short-term Methods for
       Estimating the Chronic Toxiciry of Effluents  in Receiving Waters to Marine and
       Estuanne Organisms.  Cincinnati, OH:  Office of Research and Development,
       Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory; EPA/600/4-87/0928.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).   1988.  Methods for Aquatic Toxiciry
       Identification Evaluations: Phase II, Toxicity identification Procedures.
       Duluth, MN:  Environmental Research Laboratory; EPA/600/3-88/035.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).   1988.  Methods for Aquatic Toxicity
       Identification Evaluations: Phase III, Toxicity Confirmation Procedures.
       Duluth, MN:  Office of Research and Development, Environmental Research
       Laboratory; EPA/600/3-88/036.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).   1988.  Superfund Exposure
       Assessment Manual. Washington, DC: Office of Solid Waste and Emergency
       Response Directive 9285.5-1; EPA/540/1-88/001.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).   1987.  Data Quality Objectives for
       Remedial Response Activities:  Development  Process.  Washington, DC:  Office of
       Solid Waste and Emergency Response, Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
       and Office of Waste Programs  Enforcement,  OSWER Directive 9355.0-7B;
       EPA/540/G-87/003.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S  EPA).   1987a.  Data Quality  Objectives for
       Remedial Response Activities:  Example Scenario:  RJ/FS Activities at a Site with
       Contaminated Soils  and Ground Water.  Washington, DC  Office of Solid Waste and
       Emergency Response,  Office of Emergency and Remedial  Response and Office of
       Waste Programs Enforcement,  OSWTR Directive 9355.0-~B. EPA/540/G-87/004.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1987.  Permit Writer's Guide to Water
       Quality-Based Permitting for Toxic Pollutants.  Washington,  DC:  Office of
       Water Regulations and Standards; EPA/440/4-87/005.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (L'S EPA).  1987.  Guidelines for Deriving
       Ambient Aquatic Life Advisory Concentrations. Washington, DC:  Office of
       Water Regulations and Standards  (unpublished).

BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 20

-------
August 21. 1996	     DRAFT

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1987.  A Compendium of Superfund
       Field Operations Methods.  Washington DC:  Office of Solid Waste and
       Emergency  Response, Office of Environmental and Remedial Response;
       EPA/540/P-87/001.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1987.  Role of Acute Toxicity
       Bioassays in the Remedial Action Process at Hazardous Waste Sites.  Corvallis,
       OR: Office of Research and Development, Environmental Research
       Laboratory;  EPA/600/8-87/044.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1987.  Ecological Risk Assessment
       in the Office of Toxic Substances:  Problems and Progress 1984-1987.
       Washington, DC: Office of Toxic Substances, Health and Environmental
       Review Division (Author.  Rodier, D.)

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1986a.  Guidelines for the Health Risk
       Assessment of Chemical Mixtures.  Washington,  DC:  Office of Health and
       Environmental Assessment; EPA/600/8-87/045.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1986.  Engineering Support Branch,
       Standard Operating Procedures and  Quality Assurance Manual.  Region IV,
       Environmental Services Division.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1986.  Guidelines for Deriving
       Numerical Criteria for the Protection of Aquatic Organisms and Their Uses.
       Washington, DC: Office of Water Regulations and Standards.

U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1986.  Qualm  Criteria for  Water 1986.
       Washington, DC: Office of Water Regulations and Standards;  EPA/440/5-86/001.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1985a.  Ambient Water Quality Criteria
      for Copper-1984. Washington, DC:  Office of Water, Regulations and Standards,
       Catena and  Standards Division. EPA/440/5-84-031.  PB85-227023.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1985.  Development of Statistical
       Distributions of Ranges of Standard  Factors Used in Exposure Assessments.
       Washington, DC: Office of Health and Environmental Assessment, OHEA-E-
       161: EPA/600/8-85/010.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1985.  Guide for Identifying Cleanup
       Alternatives at Hazardous Waste Sites and Spills.  Washington, DC:  Office of
       Solid Waste  and Emergency  Response; EPA/600/3-83/063, NTIS PB86-144664.

                                                              BIBLIOGRAPHY. Page 21

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1985.  Methods for Measuring the
       Acute Toxiciry of Effluents to Freshwater and Marine Organisms.  Cincinnati,
       OH'  Office of Research and Development, EnvironmentaJ Monitoring and
       Support Laboratory; EPA/600/4-85/013.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1985.  Shon-term Methods for
       Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents in Receiving Waters to Freshwater
       Organisms.  Cincinnati, OH: Office of Research and Development,
       Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory; EPA/600/4-85/014.

•U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).   1984a,  Risk Assessment and
       Management:  Framework for Decision Making.  Washington, DC:  Office of
       Policy, Planning, and Evaluation; EPA/600/9-85/002.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S.  EPA). 1984. Estimating "Concern Levels"
      for Concentrations of Chemical Substances  in  the Environment. Washington,
       DC: Office of Toxic Substances, EnvironmentaJ Effects Branch.

U.S. EnvironmentaJ Protection Agency (U.S.  EPA). 1984. Technical Support Manual:
       Waterbody Surveys and Assessments for Conducting Use Attainability Analyses:
       Volume II: Estuarine Systems.  Washington, DC:  Office of Water Regulations
       and Standards.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S.  EPA). 1984. Technical Support Manual:
       Waterbody Surveys and Assessments for Conducting Use Attainability Analyses:
       Volume III:  Lake Systems.  Washington, DC:   Office of Water Regulations  and
       Standards.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S  EPA). 1983. Technical Support Manual:
       Waterbody Surveys and Assessments for Conducting Use Attainability Analyses.
       Washington, DC:  Office of Water Regulations and Standards (November).

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S.  EPA). 1983. Environmental Effects of
       Regulates Concern  Under TSCA    \  Pisinon  Paper.  '-Visrungton, DC:
       Office of Toxic Substances, Health and Environmental Review Division
       (Author   Qements,  R.G.)

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U S  EPA) and Department of the Army, U.S. Army
       Corps of Engineers (US ACE).  1994b. Evaluation of Dredged Material  Proposed for
       Discharge in  Waters of the  U.S. •- Testing Manual (Draft I: Inland Testing Manual.
       Washington. DC: EPA Office of Water.  EPA/823/B-94/002.
BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 22

-------
August 21. 1996	.	DRAFT

Watras. C.J.; Huckabee, J.W. (eds.).  1995.  Mercury Pollution: Integration and Synthesis.
       Boca Raton. FL:  CRC Press, Inc., Lewis  Publishers.

*Weil, C.S.; McCollister,  D.D.  1963.  Relationship between short- and long-term
       feeding studies in designing an effective toxicity test.  Agr. Food Chem. 11:
       486-491.

Wentsel, R.S.;  LaPoint, T.W.; Simini, M.; Checkai. R.T.; Ludwig. D.; Brewer, L.  1994.
       Procedural Guidelines for Ecological Risk Assessments at U.S. Army Sites, Volume I.
       Aberdeen Proving  Ground, MD:  Edgewood Research, Development, and Engineering
       Center,  U.S. Army Chemical and Biological Defense Command. Rept. No. ERDEC-
       TR-221.
                                                               BIBLIOGRAPHY, Page 23

-------
            APPENDIX A

EXAMPLE ECOLOGICAL RISK ASSESSMENTS
       FOR HYPOTHETICAL SITES

-------
                                  INTRODUCTION

       Appendix A provides examples of Steps 1  through 5 of the ecological risk assessment
process for three hypothetical sites:

       (1)     A former municipal landfill from which copper is leaching into a large pond
              down-gradient of the  site (the copper site);

       (2)     A former chemical production facility that spilled DDT, which has been
              transported into  a  nearby stream by surface water runoff (the DDT site); and

       (3)     A former waste-oil recycling facility that disposed of PCBs in a lagoon from
              which extensive soil contamination  has resulted (the PCS site).

These examples are intended to illustrate key points in Steps  1  through 5 of the ecological
risk assessment process. No actual site is the basis for the examples.

       The examples stop with Step 5 because the remaining steps (6 through 8) of the
ecological risk assessment process and the risk management decisions depend on site-specific
data collected during a site investigation.  We have not attempted to develop hypothetical data
for analysis or the full range of information that a site risk manager would consider when
evaluating remedial options.

-------
August 21.  1996	      DRAFT

                          EXAMPLE 1:  COPPER SITE
STEP 1: SCREENING-LEVEL PROBLEM FORMULATION AND ECOLOGICAL
EFFECTS EVALUATION

       Site history.  This is a former municipal landfill located in an upland area of the
mid-Atlantic plain.  Residential, commercial, and industrial refuse was disposed of at this site
in the 1960s and 1970s.  Large amounts of copper wire also were disposed at this site over
several years.  Currently, minimal cover has been placed over the  fill  and planted  with
grasses.  Terrestrial  ecosystems in the vicinity  of the landfill include upland forest and
successional fields.  Nearby land uses include agriculture and residential and commercial uses.
The landfill cover has deteriorated in several locations.  Leachate seeps have been noted on
the slope of the landfill, and several seeps discharge to a five-acre pond down-gradient of the
site.

       Site visit.  A preliminary site visit was conducted and the ecological checklist was
completed.  The checklist indicated that the pond has an organic substrate; emergent
vegetation, including cattail and Phragmites, occurs along the shore near the leachate seeps;
and the pond reaches a depth of five feet toward the middle.  Fathead  minnows, carp, and
several species of sunfish were observed, and the benthic macromvertebrate community
appeared to be diverse. The pond water was clear, indicating an absence of phytoplankton.
The pond appears to function as a valuable habitat for fish and other wildlife using this area.
Preliminary sampling indicated elevated copper levels in the seep as well as elevated base
cations, total organic carbon (TOC), and depressed pH levels (pH 5.7).

       Problem formulation.  Copper is leaching from the landfill into the  pond from a
seep area. EPA's ambient  water  quality criteria document for  copper (U.S. EPA, 1985)
indicates  that it can  cause toxic effects  in aquatic plants, aquatic  invertebrates, and young fish
at relatively low water concentrations.  Thus, the seep might threaten the ability of the pond
to support macromvertebrate and fish communities and the wildlife that feed on them.
Terrestrial ecosystems do not need to be evaluated because the overland flow  of the  seeps is
limited to short gullies, a few inches wide.  Thus, the area of concern  has been identified as
the five-acre pond and the  associated leachate seeps.  Copper in  surface  water and sediments
of the pond might be of ecological concern.

      Ecological  effects evaluation.  Copper is toxic to both aquatic  plants and aquatic
animals.  Therefore, aquatic toxicity-based data will be used to screen for ecological risk in
the preliminary nsk  calculation.  The screening ecotoxicity value selected for  water-column
exposure  is  the U.S. EPA chronic ambient water quality criterion (12  ug/L at  a water hardness
of 100 mg/L as CaCO3).  The screening ecotoxicity value for copper  in sediments was
identified as 34 mg/kg (U.S. EPA, 1996).

                                                                   APPENDIX A, Page 1

-------
August 21. 1996	                   DRAFT

STEP 2:  SCREENING-LEVEL EXPOSURE ESTIMATE AND RISK CALCULATION

       Exposure estimate.  Preliminary sampling data indicate that the leachate contains
53 ug/L copper as well as elevated base cauons, total organic carbon (TOO, and depressed
pH (pH 5.7V  Sediment concentrations range from 300 mg/kg to  below detection (2 mg/kg),
decreasing with distance from the leachate seeps.

       Risk calculation.  The copper concentration in the seep  water (53 ug/L) exceeds the
chronic water quality criterion for copper  (12 ug/L).  The maximum sediment copper
concentration of 300 mg/kg exceeds the screening ecotoxicity value for copper in sediments
(34 mg/kg).  Therefore, the screening-level hazard quotients for both sediment and water
exceed one.  The decision at the Scientific/Management Decision  Point (SMDP) is to continue
the ecological risk assessment.

       Similar screening for the levels of base cations generated hazard quotients below 1 in
the seep water. Although TOC and pH are not regulated under CERCLA, the possibility that
these parameters might affect the biota of  the pond should be kept in mind if surveys of the
pond biota are conducted.  Sediment concentrations of chemicals other than copper generated
hazard quotients (HQs) of less than 1 at the maximum concentration found.


STEP 3:  BASEUNE RISK ASSESSMENT PROBLEM FORMULATION

       Based on the screening-level risk assessment, copper is known to be the only
contaminant of ecological concern at the site.

       Ecotoxicity literature review.  A review of the literature on the ecotoxicity of
copper to aquauc biota was conducted and revealed several types  of information.  Young
aquatic organisms are  more sensitive to copper than adults (Demayo et al., 1982; Kaplan  and
Yon, 1961; Hubschman, 1965).  Fish larvae usually are more sensitive than embryos (McKim
et al., 1978; Weis and Weis, 1991), and fish become  less sensitive to copper as body weight
increases (Demayo et al., 1982).  Although the exact mechanism of toxicity to fish is
unknown,  a loss of osmotic control has been noted in some studies (Demayo et al. 1982;
Cheng and Sullivan,  1977).

       Flowthrough toxicity studies  in which copper  concentrations were measured revealed
LC50 values ranging from 75 to 790 ug/L  for  fathead minnows and 63  to 800 ug/L for
common carp (U.S. EPA,  1985).  Coldwater fish species, such as  rainbow trout, can be more
sensitive, and species  like pumpkinsecds (a sunfish) and blue gills  are less sensitive (U.S.
EPA, 1985).  Although fish fry usually are the most  sensitive  life stage, this is not always the
case;  Pickering et al. (1977) determined an LC50 of 460 ug/L to  6-month-old juveniles and
an LC50 of 490 ug/L to 6-week-old fry for fathead minnows. A  copper concentration in

APPENDIX A, Page 2

-------
 August :i. 1996	_____	DRAFT

 water of 37 ug/1 has been shown to cause a significant reduction in fish egg production
 (Pickering et al..  1977).

       Elevated levels of copper in sediments have been associated with changes in benthic
 community structure, notably reduced numbers of species (Winner et a]., 1975;  Kraft and
 Sypmewski, 1981).  Studies also have been conducted with adult Hyalella azteca (an
 amphipod) exposed to copper in sediments.  One of these studies indicated an LC50 of 1,078  •
 mg/kg in  the sediment (Cairns et al., 1984); however,  a  no-observed-adverse-effect  level
 (NOAEL)  for copper in sediments was not identified for an early life stage of a benthic
 invertebrate.

       A  literature review of the ecotoxicity of copper to aquatic plants, both algae and
 vascular plants, did not reveal information on the toxic mechanism by which copper affects
 plants. The review did indicate  that exposure of plants to high copper levels inhibits
 photosynthesis and growth (U.S. EPA,  1985), cell separation after cell division (Hatch, 1978),
 and iron uptake (reference).   Several studies conducted  using Selenastnun capricornutwn
 indicated that concentrations at 300 ug/L kill algae after 7 days, and a value of 90 ug/1 causes
 complete growth inhibition after 7 days  (Harriett et al., 1974).

       The literature indicates that copper does not biomagnify in food chains and does not
 bioaccumuiate in most animals because  it is a biologically regulated essential element.
 Accumulation in phytoplankton and filter-feeding mollusks, however, does occur. The
 toxicity of copper in water is influenced by water hardness, alkalinity, and pH.

       Assessment endpoints and conceptual model. Based on the screening-level
 risk assessment and on the ecotoxicity literature review,  development of a conceptual model
 for the sue is initiated. Copper can be  acutely or chronically toxic  to organisms in  an aquatic
community through direct exposure of the organisms to copper in the water and sediments.
Threats of copper to higher trophic level organisms are unlikely to  exceed  threats to
organisms at the base of the food chain, because  copper is an essential nutrient which is
effectively  regulated by most organisms if the exposure is below toxic levels.  Aquatic plants
(particularly phytoplankton) and filter-feeding mollusks (e.g., clams), however,  are poor at
 regulating copper and are likely  to be sensitive receptors. In addition, fish fry can be very
 sensitive to copper in water.

       Based on these receptors and the potential for both acute and chronic toxjcity, an
appropriate general  assessment endpomt for the ecosystem would be the maintenance of the
community composition of the pond.  A more operational definition of the assessment
endpomt would be the maintenance of pond community structure typical for the locality and
for the physical attributes of the pond, with no loss of species or community alteration due to
copper toxicity.
                                                                     APPENDIX A, Page 3

-------
August :i. 1996	                      DRAFT

       A flow diagram was added to the conceptual model to depict the environmental
pathways that could result in impacts of copper to the pono s biota (see Exhibit A-l).  Direct
exposure to copper in the pond water and sediments could cause acute or chronic toxicity in
early life stages of fish and/or benthic invertebrates, and in aquatic plants. Risks to filter-
feeding mollusks and phytoplankton as well as animals  that feed on them are not considered
because the mollusks and phytoplankton are unlikely to occur in significant quantities in the
pond.  The exposure  pathways that will be evaluated, therefore, are direct contact with
contaminated sediments and water.

       Hypothesis formulation.  The testable hypothesis is that concentrauons of copper
present in the sediments and water over at least part of the pond are toxic to aquauc plants or
animals.  A further question is at what copper concentration in sediments do adverse  effects
become detectable?
STEP 4:  MEASUREMENT ENDPOINTS AND STUDY DESIGN

      To answer the hypothesis identified in Step 3, three lines of evidence were considered
when selecting measurement endpoints: (1) whether the ambient copper levels are higher
than levels known to be directly toxic to aquauc organisms likely or known to be present in
the  pond; (2) whether water and sediments taken from the pond are more toxic to aquatic
organisms than water and sediments from  a reference pond; and (3) whether the aquatic
community structure in the site pond is simplified relative to a reference pond.

      Measurement endpoints.  Since the  identified assessment endpoint is maintaining
a typical pond community structure, the possibility of directly measuring the condition of the
plant, fish, and macroinvertebrate communities  in the pond was considered.  Consultation with
experts on benthic macroinvertebrates suggested that standard measures of the pond benthic
invertebrate  community probably would be insensitive measures of existing  effects at  this
particular site because of  the high  spatial variation in benthic communities within and among
ponds of this size.  Measuring the  fish community also would be unsuitable, due to the
limited size  of the pond and low diversity of fish species anticipated.  Since copper is not
expected to  bioaccumulate or biomagmfy  in this pond, direct toxiciry testing was selected as
an appropriate measurement endpoint.   Because early life  stages ;end to be  mere sensitive to
the  toxic effects  of copper than older Life  stages, chronic toxiciry would be  measured  on early
Life stages.   For  animals,  toxicity is defined as  a statistically significant decrease in survival or
juvenile growth  rates of a population exposed to water or sediments from the  site compared
with a population exposed to water or sediments from a reference site.  For plants, toxicity is
defined  as a statistically significant decrease in  growth rate \vith the same comparison.
 APPENDIX A, Page 4

-------
August 21. 1996
                                                                               DRAI-T
                                                    EXHIBIT A-1
                                       Conceptual Model for the Copper Site
                                                                       MEASUREMENT I NDIVMNI
                                                                     (Sediment loxkily to Hyaltllu aileca)
     PRIMARY SOURCE
          (Landfill)
SECONDARY SOURCE
  ((iroundwaler seer.)
                                                            TERTIARY SOURCE
                                                          (Sediment, exposure point
                                                            for aquatic receptors)
                                                             TERTIARY SOURCE
                                                            (Surface water, exposure
                                                            point for aquatic receptors)
                                                              AQUATIC RECEPTOR
                                                            H
AQUATIC RECEPTOR
                                                                          MEASUREMENI ENDPOIN I
                                                                        (Surface water toxkily to Stlenairum
                                                                      capricornalum and Pimtphales promelas)
                                                                                                  APPENDIX A. Page 5

-------
August 21. 1996                                                            	DRAFT

       One toxicity test selected is a 10-day (i.e., chronic) solid-phase sediment toxicity test
using an early life stage of Hyalella azieca.  The measures of effects for the  test are mortality
rates and growth rates (measured as length and weight increases).  Two water-column  toxicity
tests will be used:  (1) a 7-day test using the alga Selenastrum capncornutum (growth  test)
and (2) a 7-day larval fish test using Pimephales promelas (mortality and growth endpomts).
The H.  azieca and P promelas toxicity tests will be used to determine the effects of copper
on early life stages of invertebrates and fish in sediment  and the water column, respectively.
The test on 5. capncornutum  will be used to determine the phytotoxiciry of copper  in the
water column.

       Study design.  To answer the questions stated in the problem formulation  step, the
water column tests will be run on 100  percent seep water, 100 percent pond water near the
seep,  100 percent reference-site water,  and the laboratory control.  U.S. EPA  test protocols
will be  followed.  Five sediment  samples will be collected from  the pond bottom at  intervals
along the observed concentration gradient, from a copper concentration of 300 mg/kg at the
leachate seeps down to approximately 5 mg/kg near the other end of the pond.  The sediment
sampling locations will transect the pond at equidistant locations and include  the point  of
maximum pond depth.  All sediment samples will be split so that copper concentrations can
be measured in sediments from each sampling location.  A reference sediment will be
collected and a laboratory control will be run. Test organisms will not be fed during the test;
sediments will be sieved to remove native organisms and debris.  Laboratory  procedures will
follow established protocols and will be documented and  reviewed  prior to initiation of the
test.  For the  water-column test, statistical comparisons will be made between responses to
each of the two pond samples and the reference site, as well as the laboratory control.
Statistical comparisons also will be made of responses to sediments taken from each sampling
location and responses to the reference sediment sample.

       Because leachate  seeps can be intermittent (depending on rainfall), the srudy  design
specifies that  a  prc-sampling visit is required to confirm that the  seep is flowing and can be
sampled. The srudy design also specifies that both sediments and water will be sampled at
the same time at each sampling location.

       As the work plan (WP) and sampling and analysis plan (SAP) were finished, the
ecological nsk assessor and the nsk manager agreed on the sue concepmal model, assessment
endpomts. and srudy design (SMDP).
STEP 5:  FIELD VERIFICATION OF STUDY DESIGN

       A site assessment was conducted two days prior to the scheduled initiation of the site
investigation to confirm that the seep was active.  It was determined that the seep was  active
and thai the site investigation could be  initiated.

APPENDIX A, Page 6

-------
August 21. 1996	                    DRAFT

REFERENCES

Banlett. L., Rabe, F W.. Funk, W.H.  1974. Effects of copper, zinc, and cadmium on
       Seienastrum capricornutum. Water Res. 8:  179-185.

Cairns, M.A.; Nebeker, A.V.;  Gakstatter, J.H.;  Griffis, W.L.  1984.  Toxicity of copper-spiked
       sediments to freshwater invertebrates.  Environ. Toxicol. Chem. 3:  345-445.

Cheng, T.C.; Sullivan, J.T.  1977.  Alterations  in the osmoregulation of the pulmonate
       gastropod Biomphalaria glabrata due to copper. J. Invert. Path. 28:  101.

Hatch, R.C.  1978. Poisons causing respiratory insufficiency.  In:  L.M. Jones, N.H. Booth
       and L.E. McDonald (eds.),  Veterinary Pharmacology and Therapeutics. Iowa State
       University, IA:  Ames  Press.

Hubschman, J.H. 1965. Effects of copper on the crayfish Orconectes rusticus (Girard). I.
       Acute toxicity. Crustaceana 12:  33-42.

Kaplan, H.M.;  Yoh, L.  1961.   Toxicity of copper to frogs.  Herpetologia 17:  131-135.

Kraft, K.J.; Sypmewski, R.H.  1981.  Effect of sediment copper on the distribution of benthic
       macroinvertebrates in the Keweenaw Waterway. J. Great Lakes Res. 7:  258-263.

McKim, J.M.: Eaton, J.G.; Holcombe, G.W. 1978.  Metal toxicity to embryos and larvae of
       eight species of freshwater fish. II. Copper. Bull. Environ. Contain. Toxicol. 19:
       608-616.

Pickering, Q.; Brungs, W.; Gast, M.  1977  Effect  of exposure time  and copper concentration
       of fathead minnows, Pimephales promelas (Rafinesque).  Aquatic Toxicol.  12: 107.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency CU.S. EPA).  1996. Ecotox Thresholds.  ECO Update,
       Intermittent Bulletin,  Volume 3, Number 2.  Washington, DC:  Office of Emergency
       and Remedial Response, Hazardous Site Evaluation Division; Publication 9345.0-
       12FSI; EPA/540/F-95/D38;  NTIS PB95-963324.

U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency (U.S. EPA). 1985. Ambient Water Quality Criteria
      for Copper. Washington, DC: Office of  Water; EPA/440/5-84/031.

Weis, P.; Weis, J.S.  1991.  The developmental toxicity of metals and metalloids in fish. In:
       Newman, M.C.; Mclntosh,  A.W. (eds.), Metal Ecotoxicology: Concepts and
       Applications.  Boca Raton,  FL: CRC Press, Inc., Lewis Publishers.
                                                                   APPENDIX A, Page 7

-------
August!]. 1990                                                                  PR APT

Winner. R.W ,  KelJmg, T.; Yeager. R.; et al.  1975.  Response of a macroinvertebrate fauna
       to a copper gradient in an expenmentaJly-polluted stream. Verb. Int. Ver.  Limnol. 19:
       2121-2127.
APPENDIX A. Page 8

-------
August :i. 1996	                                               DRAFT

                            EXAMPLE 2:  DDT SITE
STEP 1:  SCREENING-LEVEL PROBLEM FORMULATION AND ECOLOGICAL
EFFECTS EVALUATION

      Site history. This is the site of a former chemical production facility located
adjacent to a stream.. The facility manufactured and packaged dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane
(DDT).  Due to poor storage practices, several DDT spills have  occurred.

      Site visit A preliminary site visit was conducted and the ecological checklist was
completed.  Information gathered indicates that surface water drainage from the site flows
through several drainage swales toward an unnamed creek.  This creek is a second-order
stream containing riffle-run areas and small pools.  The stream substrate is composed of sand
and gravel in the pools with some depositional areas in the backwaters, and primarily cobble
in the riffles.

      Problem formulation. Previous sampling efforts indicated the presence of DDT
and its metabolites in the stream's sediments over several miles  at a concentrations up to  230
mg/kg.  A variety of wildlife,  especially piscivorous birds, use this area for feeding.  Many
species of minnow have been  noted in this stream.  DDT is well known for its tendency to
bioaccumulate and biomagnify in food chains, and available evidence indicates that  it can
cause reproductive failure in birds due to eggshell thinning.

      The risk assessor and risk manager agreed that the assessment endpoint is adverse
effects on reproduction of high-trophic-level wildlife, particularly piscivorous birds.

      Ecological effects evaluation.  Because DDT is well studied, a dietary
concentration above which eggshell thinning might occur was identified in existing U.S. EPA
documents on the ecotoxicity of DDT. Moreover, a no-observed-adverse-effect-level
(NOAEL) for the ingestion route for birds also was identified.

STEP 2:  SCREENING-LEVEL EXPOSURE ESTIMATE AND RISK CALCULATION

      Exposure estimate.   For the screening-level exposure  estimate, maximum
concentrations of DDT identified in the sediments were used. To estimate the concentration
of DDT  m forage fish, the maximum concentration in sediments was multiplied by  the
highest DDT bioaccumulation factor relating forage fish tissue concentrations to sediment
concentrations reported in the literature.  Moreover, it was assumed that the piscivorous birds
obtain 100 percent of their diet from the  contaminated area.
                                                                  APPENDIX A. Page 9

-------
August 21. !996	DRAFT

       Risk calculation.  The predicted concentrations of DDT in forage fish were
compared with the dietary NOAEL for DDT in birds.  This nsk screen  indicated that DDT
concentrations measured at this site might be  high enough fo cause adverse reproductive
effects in birds.  Thus, transfer of DDT from  the sediments to the stream and biota are of
concern at thus sue.
STEP 3:  BASELINE RISK ASSESSMENT PROBLEM  FORMULATION

       Based on the screening-level risk assessment, potential bioaccumulation of DDT in
aquatic food chains and effects of DDT on reproduction in piscivorous birds are known
concerns.  Dunng refinement of the problem,  the potential  for additional ecological effects of
DDT was examined.

       Ecotoxicrty literature review.  In freshwater systems,M2DT can have direct effects
on animals, particularly insects.  A literature review of the  aquatic toxicity of DDT was
conducted, and a NOAEL and LOAEL identified for the toxicity of DDT to aquatic insects.
Aquatic plants are not  affected by DDT.   Additional quantitative information on effects of
DDT on birds was reviewed, particularly to identify what level of eggshell thinning is likely
to reduce reproductive  success.  A number of  studies have  correlated DDT residues measured
in eggs of birds to increased eggshell thinning and egg loss due to breakage.  Eggshell
thinning of more than 20 percent appears  to result in decreased hatching success due  to
eggshell breakage (Anderson and Hickey, 1972; Dilworth et al.,  1972). Information was not
available for any piscivorous species of bird.  Lincer (1975) conducted a laboratory feeding
study using American kestrels.  Females  fed a diet of 6 mg/kg DDE1 (1.1 mg/kgBW-day)
produced eggs with shells which were 25.5 percent thinner than archived eggshells collected
prior to widespread use of DDT. Based on this information, a LOAEL of 1.1 mg/kgBW-day
was selected to evaluate the effects of DDT on piscivorous birds.

       Assessment endpoints and conceptual model.  Based on knowledge of the
fate and transport of DDT in aquatic systems and the ecotoxiciry of DDT to aquatic
organisms  and birds, a conceptual model was  initiated. DDT buned in the sediments can be
released to the water column during resuspension and redistribution of the sediments.  Some
diffusion of DDT to the water column from the sediment surface aJso will occur.  The benthic
community would be an initial  receptor for the DDT in sediments, which could result in
reduced benthic species abundance and DDT accumulation in  species  that remain.  Fish that
feed on benthic organisms  might be exposed to DDT both  in  the water column and in their
food.  Piscivorous birds would  be exposed to  the DDT that has accumulated in the fish, and
could be exposed at levels  sufficiently high to cause more  than 20 percent eggshell thinning.
    DDE is a Jegradauon product of DDT.  typically, field measures of DDT arc reported as the  sum of the
conccntrauons ?f DDT, DDE. and DDD lanoiher degradation product).

APPENDIX A. Page  10

-------
August 21. 1996	   DRAFT

                            EXAMPLE 3:  PCB SITE
STEP 1:  SCREENING-LEVEL PROBLEM  FORMULATION AND ECOLOGICAL
EFFECTS EVALUATION

      Site history. This is a former waste-oil recycling facility located in a remote area.
Oils contaminated with polychlorinated biphenyl compounds (PCBs) were disposed of in a
lagoon.  The lagoon was not lined, and the soil  was composed mostly of sand.  Oils
contaminated with PCBs migrated through the soil and contaminated a wide area adjacent to
the site.

      Site visit.  During the preliminary site visit, the ecological checklist was completed.
Most of the habitat is upland forest, old field, and successional terrestrial areas.  Biological
surveys at this site have noted a variety of small mammal signs.  In addition, red-tailed hawks
were observed.

      Problem formulation.  At least 10 acres surrounding the site are known to be
contaminated with PCBs. Some PCBs are reproductive toxins in mammals that, when
ingested, induce (i.e., increase concentrations and activity of) enzyme systems in the liver
(Melancon and Lech, 1983).  The enzymes are not specific for PCBs and also will enhance
the degradation of steroid hormones (Peakall, 1975). The impaired reproduction that has been
observed in mammals of several species exposed to PCBs might be caused by PCB-induced
reduction in circulating steroid hormones (Tanabe, 1988).  Other effects, such as liver
pathology, also are evident at high exposure levels (Fuller and Hobson, 1986).  Given this
information, the screening-level ecological risk assessment should include potential exposure
pathways by which mammals could be exposed  to PCBs.

      Several possible exposure pathways were evaluated for mammals.  PCBs are not
highly volatile, so inhalation of PCBs by animals would not be an important exposure
pathway.  PCBs in soils generally are not taken up by most plants, but are accumulated by
soil macroinvertebrates.  Thus, herbivores, such as voles and rabbits, would not be exposed to
PCBs in most of their diets; whereas insectivores, such as shrews, or omnivores, such as deer
mic-, could be exposed to accumulated PCBs in their diets.  PCBs also arc known to
biomagnify in terrestrial food chains; therefore,  the ingestion exposure route needs evaluation,
and shrews and/or deer mice would be appropriate mammalian receptors to evaluate in this
exposure pathway.

      Potential reproductive effects on predators that feed on shrews or mice also would be
important to evaluate. The literature indicated that exposure to PCBs through the food chain
could cause reproductive impairment in predatory birds through a similar mechanism as in
APPENDIX A. Page 16

-------
August I!. 1396                                                                 DRAFT

U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1989.  Rapid Bioassessment Protocols
      for Use in Streams and Rivers: Benthic Macroinvenebrates and Fish.  Washington,
      DC. Office of Water (Plafkin. J.L.. Barbour,  M.T., Poner. K.D., Gross, S.K.. and
      Huehes, R.M.. authors); EPA/440/4-89/001.
                                                                 APPENDIX A, Page 15

-------
August 21. 1996	                      DRAFT

success in kingfishers due to site contamination is likely, and an HQ of less than one implies
impacts due to site contaminants are unlikely (see text for a description of the limitations of
HQs;.

STEP 5:  FIELD VERIFICATION OF STUDY DESIGN

       A field assessment was conducted and several small fish collection techniques were
used to determine which technique was the most effective for captunng creek chub at the site.
Collected chub were  examined to determine the size range available and to determine if
individuals could be sexed.

       Seine netting the areas targeted indicated that the creek chub might not be present in
sufficient numbers to provide the necessary biomass for chemical analyses.  Based on these
findings, a contingency plan was agreed to (SMDP), which stated that both the creek chub
and the longnoscd dace (Rhinichthys cataractae) would be collected.  If the creek chub were
collected at all locations in sufficient numbers,  then these samples would be analyzed and the
dace would be released.  If sufficient creek chub could not be collected but sufficient
longnosed dace could, the  longnosed dace would be analyzed and the creek chub released.  If
neither species could  be collected at all locations in sufficient numbers, then a mix of the two
species would be used; however, for any given site only one species would be analyzed.  In
addition, at one location, preferably one with high  DDT levels in the  sediment, sufficient
numbers of approximately 20 gram individuals  of both species would be collected to allow
comparison (and calibration) of the accumulation between the two species. If necessary to
meet the analytic chemistry needs, similarly-sized individuals of both sexes of creek chub
would be pooled.  Pooling two or more individuals will be necessary  for the smaller dace.
Samples will be collected by electro-shocking.  Field notes for all samples will include the
number of fish per sample pool, sex, weight, length, presence of parasites or deformities, and
other measures.
REFERENCES

Anderson, D.W.; Rickey, JJ.  1972.  Eggshell changes in certain North American birds.  In:
       Voos, K.H. (ed.), Proceedings: XV International Ornithological Congress.  The
       Hague, Netherlands; pp.  514-540.

Dilworth, T.G., Keith, J.A.; Pearce, P.A.; Reynolds, L.M.  1972.  DDE and eggshell thickness
       in New Brunswick woodcock.  J. Wild! Manage. 36:  1186-1193.

Lincer, J.L.  1975.  DDE-induced eggshell thinning in the American kestrel; a comparison of
       the field situation and  laboratory results.  J. App. Ecol.  12:  781-793.
APPENDIX A, Page 14

-------
 August 21.  1996                                                                   DRAFT

 sediments.  Adult creek chub average 10 inches and about 20 grams, allowing for analysis of
 individual fish.  Creek chub also have small home ranges dunng the spring  and summer, and
 thus it should be possible to relate DDT levels in  the chub to DDT levels in the sediments.

       For the assessment endpomt of maintaining stream community stnicrure,  the selected
 measurement endpomts were several metrics describing the abundance and trophic structure of
 the stream  benthic  macromvertebrate community.

       Study design.  Creek chub will be collected at several locations with known DDT
 concentrations in sediments. The  fish will be analyzed  for body burdens of DDT, and the
 relationship between DDT levels in  the  sediments  and in the  creek chub will be established.
 The fish  DDT concentrations can be used to evaluate the DDT threat to piscivorous birds
 feeding on  the fish at each location.  Using the DDT concentrations measured in fish that
correspond to a LOA£L and NOAEL for adverse effects in birds, the corresponding sediment
contamination levels can be determined.  These sediment DDT levels then can be used to
derive a cleanup level that would reduce threats of eggshell thinning to piscivorous birds.

       The study design for measuring DDT residue levels in creek chub specifies that 10
creek chub of the same size and sex will be collected at each location.  Each creek chub
should be at least 20 grams, so that  individuals can be analyzed.  In addition, at one location,
QA/QC requirements dictate that an additional 10 fish are collected.  In this example,  it is
necessary to verify in the field that sufficient numbers of creek chub of the specified size are
present to meet the tissue sampling requirements.   In addition, stream conditions  must be
evaluated to determine what fish sampling techniques will work best at the targeted locations.
       The study design and methods for benthic macroinvertebrate collection followed the
Rapid Bioassessmem Protocol (RBP) manual for level three evaluation (U.S. EPA. 1989).
Benthic macromvertebrate samples were  co-located with sampling for fish tissue residue
levels so that one set of co-located water and sediment samples for analytic chemistry could
serve for comparison with both tissue analyses.

       The study design also specified that the hazard quotient (HQ) method would be used
to evaluate the effects of DDT on the kingfisher dunng nsk characterization.  To determine
the HQ. the estimated daily dose of DDT consumed by the kingfishers is divided by a
LOAEL of 1 1 mgAgBW-day for kestrels.  To estimate the DDT dose to the kingfisher, the
DDT concentrations in the chub will be multiplied by the  fish ingestion rate for kingfishers
and divided by the body weight of kingfishers.  This dose will be adjusted by the area use
factor.   The area use factor corresponds to  the proportion of the diet of a kingfisher that
would  consist of fish from the contaminated  area.  The area use factor is a function of the
home range size of kingfishers relative to the area of contamination.  The adjusted dose will
be compared to the LOAEL.  A HQ of greater than one implies that impaired reproductive


                                                                   APPENDIX A, Page 13

-------
August 21. 1996
                                                                                       DKAIT
                                                      EXHIBIT A-2
                                      Conceptual Model for the Stream DDT Site
                                                                     MEASUREMENT ENOI'OIN I
                                                                    (DDT concentration in fish tissue.
                                                                      CHpoiurc point for kingfisher)
                                                         SECONDARY RECEPTOR
                                                                  (Fish)
                                                                 II KIIAKY Kid I'lOK
                                                                      (Kingfisher)
    PRJMARY SOURCE
         (Plant site)
SECONDARY SOURCE
   (Surface drainage)
     TERTIARY SOURCE
(Stream sediment*, exposure point
 for fish and macroinvcrtebralcs)
A *
  I'KIMAHY Kl( I I'lOK
(llentliic macroinvenchrates.
           poinl. fish)
                                                                         MEASUKUMENT I NDPOIN I
                                                                           (Denthic macroinvcrtebrale
                                                                             community struclurc)
 APPENDIX A, Page 12

-------
August 21. 1996                                                                  DRAFT

Based on this information, two assessment endpomts were identified:  (1) maintaining stream
commumt> structure typical for the scream order and location, and i2) protecting piscivorous
birds lYom eagshell thinning that could result in reduced  reproductive  success.

       A flow diagram of the exposure pathways for DDT was added to the conceptual model
(Exhibit A-I).  The diagram identifies the primary, secondary, and tertiary sources of DDT at
the site, as well as the primary, secondary, and ternary types of receptors that could be
exposed.

       Hypothesis formulation. Two  hypotheses were developed:  (1) the stream
community has been affected by the DDT, and (2) food-chain accumulation and transfer of
DDT occurs to the extent that 20 percent or more eggshell thjnmng occurs in  piscivorous
birds that use the  area.
STEP 4:  MEASUREMENT ENDPOINTS AND STUDY  DESIGN

       Measurement endpoints.  For the assessment endpoint of protecting piscivorous
birds from eggshell thinning, the conceptual model indicated that DDT in sediments could
reach  piscivorous birds through forage  fish.  Belted kingfishers are known to feed  in the
stream.  They also have the smallest home  range of the piscivorous birds in the area, which
means  that more kingfishers can forage entirely from the contaminated stream area than can
other species of piscivorous birds.  Thus, one can conclude that, if the risk assessment  shows
no threat of eggshell thinning to the kingfisher, there  should  be minimal or no threat to other
piscivorous birds that might utilize the  site.  Eggshell thinning in the belted kingfisher
therefore was selected as the measure of effect.

       Data  from the literature  suggest that DDT  can have a bioaccumulation factor in
surface water systems  as high as six  orders of magnitude (10 1; however, in most aquatic
ecosystems, the actual bioaccumulation of DDT from the environment is lower, often
substantially lower, than 10   Many factors influence the actual accumulation of DDT in the
environment.  There is considerable debate over the parameters of any proposed theoretical
bioaccumulation model; therefore,  it  was decided  to measure tissue residue levels in the
forage fish at the site instead of estimating the tissue residue levels in  forage fish using a
bioaccumulation factor.

       Existing information on the distribution of DDT in  the stream indicates  that a general
gradient of DDT concentrations exists  in the sediments, and  five  locations could be identified
that corresponded to a range of DDT concentrations in sediments.  Based on information
available on fish communities m streams similar to the one in the sue area, creek chub
(Semotilus airomaculatus]  were selected  to measure exposure levels for kingfishers.  Creek
chub feed on bcnthic invertebrates, which are in direct contact with the contaminated


                                                                   APPENDIX A, Page  11

-------
*"8usi:i. 1996	DRAFT

mammals.  The prey of red-tail hawks include voles, deer mice, and various insects.  Thus,
this raptor could be at nsk of adverse reproductive outcomes.

       Ecological effects evaluation.  No-observed-adverse-effect levels (NOAELs) for
the effects of PCBs and other contaminants at the site on mammals, birds, and other biota
were identified in the literature.
STEP 2:  SCREENING-LEVEL EXPOSURE ESTIMATE AND RISK CALCULATION

      Exposure estimate.  For the screening-level risk calculation, the highest PCB and
other contaminant levels measured onsite were used to estimate exposures.

      Risk calculation.  The potential contaminants of concern were screened based on
NOAELs for exposure routes appropriate to each contaminant.  Based on this screen, PCBs
were confirmed to be -the only contaminants of concern to small mammals, and possibly to
birds,  based on the levels measured at this site.  Thus, at the SMDP, the risk manager and
risk assessor decided to continue to Step 3 of the ecological risk assessment process.
STEP 3:  BASELINE RISK ASSESSMENT PROBLEM FORMULATION

      The screening-level ecological risk assessment confirmed that PCBs are of concern to
small mammals based on the levels measured at the site and suggested that predatory birds
might be at risk from PCBs that accumulate in some of their mammalian prey.

      Ecotoxicity literature review. A literature review was conducted to evaluate
potential reproductive effects in birds.  PCBs have been implicated as a cause of reduced
reproductive success of piscivorous birds (e.g., cormorants, terns) in the Great Lakes
(Colborn, 1991).  Limited information was available on the effects  of PCBs to red-tailed
hawks.  A study on American kestrel indicated  that consumption of 33 mg/kgBW-day PCbs
resulted in a significant decrease in sperm concentration in male kestrels (Bird et al.,  1983).
Implications of this decrease for mating success in kestrels was not evaluated in the study, but
studies on other bird species indicate that it could increase the incidence of infertile eggs and
therefore reduce the number of young fledged per pair. The Great Lakes International Joint
Commission (LJC) recommends 0.1 mg/kg  total PCBs  as a prey tissue level that will protect
predatory birds and mammals (LJC, 1988).  (This number is used as an illustration and not to
suggest that this particular level is appropriate for a given site.)

      Assessment endpolnts and  conceptual model.  Based on the screening-level
risk assessment for small mammals and the results  of  the ecotoxicity  literature search for
birds, a conceptual model was initiated  for the  site, which included consideration of predatory

                                                                 APPENDIX A, Page 17

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

birds (e.g., red-tailed hawlcs) and their prey. The ecological nsk assessor and the risk
manager agreed (SMDP) that the general assessment endpomt for the site would be the
protection of predatory birds from reproductive impairment caused by PCBs that had
accumulated in their prey.  They  identified an  operational assessment endpoint as reproductive
impairment in  red-tailed hawlcs.

       An exposure pathway diagram was developed for the conceptual model to identify the
exposure pathways by red-tailed hawks could be exposed to PCBs originating in the soil at
the site (see  Exhibit A-3).  While voles may be prevalent at the site,  they are not part of the
exposure pathway for predators because they are herbivorous and PCBs  do not accumulate in
plants.   Deer mice (Peromyscus maniculatus), on the other  hand, also are abundant at the site
and, being omnivorous, arc likely to be exposed to PCBs that have accumulated in the insect
component of their diet.

       Hypothesis formulation.  Based on the assessment endpoint and conceptual model,
the testable hypothesis is that concentrations of PCBs in the prey of the  red-tailed hawk
exceed levels known to impair reproduction in  predatory birds.
STEP 4:  MEASUREMENT ENDPOINTS AND STUDY DESIGN

      Measurement endpoints.  To test the hypothesis that PCB levels in prey of the
red-tailed hawk exceed levels that might impair their reproduction, PCB levels will be
measured in deer mice taken from the site (of all of the species in the diet of the red-tailed
hawk, deer mice are assumed to accumulate the highest levels of PCBs).  The measures of
exposure will  be compared with measures of effect reported in the literature.

      Study design.  The available measures of PCB concentrations in soil at the site
indicated a gradient of decreasing PCB concentration with increasing distance from the
unlmed  lagoon.  Three locations along this gradient were selected to measure PCB
concentrations in prey. The study design specified that eight deer mice of the same size and
sex will be collected at each location. Each  mouse should be approximately 20 grams so that
contaminant levels can be measured in individual mice. With concentrations measured  in
eight individual mice, it is possible to estimate a mean concentration and  an upper confidence
limit of the mean concentration in deer mice for the location.  In addition, QA/QC
requirements dictate that an additional eight deer mice should be collected at one location.

       For this site, it is necessary to verify  that sufficient  numbers of deer mice of the
specified size are present to meet the sampling requirements. In addition, habitat conditions
must be evaluated to determine what trapping techniques will work at the targeted locations.
APPENDIX A, Page 18

-------
August 21. 1996
                                                                           DRAIT
                                                   EXHIBIT A-3
                                  Conceptual Model for the Terrestrial PCB Site
                                                                     MI-ASURI:MI:NI i NDI-OINI
                                                                        (PCIIs in iiwmse (issue,
                                                                    cxsposufc point for red UilcJ hawk]
           PRIMARY SOIWCi:
             (Waste lagoons)
SI-CONDARY SOURCE
      (Sue soils)
PRIMARY RUCI'PTOR
  (Deer IIHIUSC)
SECONDARY Rl CM'IOR
    (Red tailed hawk)
                                                                                               APPENDIX A. Page 19

-------
 August 21. 1996	                                  DRAFT

       The study design specifies further that the hazard quotient (HQ) method will be used to
 estimate the nsk of reproductive impairment m the red-tailed hawk from exposure to PCBs in their
 prey  To determine the  HQ, the measured  DDT concentrations ;n deer mice will be divided by the
 LOAEL of 33 mg/kgBW-day for a decrease in sperm concentration in kestrels.  To estimate the dose
 to the red-tailed hawk, the PCB concentrations in deer mice will be multiplied by the quantity of deer
 mice that could be ingested  by a red-tailed  hawk each day and divided by  the body weight of the
 hawk.  This dose will be adjusted by a factor that corresponds to the proportion  of the diet of a red-
 tailed hawk that would come from  the contaminated area.  This area use factor is a  function of the
 home range size of the hawks relative to the area of contamination. A HQ of greater than one implies
 that impacts due to site contamination are likely, and an HQ of less than one implies impacts due to
 site contaminants are unlikely.
STEP 5: FIELD VERIFICATION OF STUDY DESIGN

    .   A field assessment using several trapping techniques was conducted to determine (1)
which technique was most effective for capturing deer mice at the site and (2) whether the
technique would yield sufficient numbers of mice over 20 grams to meet the  specified
sampling design.  On the first evening  of the field assessment, two survey lines of 10 live
traps were ser for deer mice in typical old-field habitat in the area believed to contain the
desired DDT concentration gradient for the study design.  At the beginning of the second day,
the traps were retrieved.  Two deer mice over 20 grams were captured in each of the  survey
lines.  These results indicate that collection of deer mice over a period of a week or less with
this number and spacing of live traps should be adequate to meet  study objectives.
REFERENCES

Bird, D.M.; Tucker, P.H.; Fox, G.A.; Lague, PC.  1983.  Synergistic effects of Aroclor 1254
       and rrurex on the semen characteristics of American kestrels.  Arch. Environ. Contam.
       Toxjcol.  12:  633-640.

Colbom, T.I.   1991.  Epidemiology of Great Lakes bald eagles.  J. Environ. Health Toxicol.
       4:  395-453.

International Joint Commission (LJQ of United  States and Canada.  1988.  Great  Lakes Water
       Quality Agreement.  Amended by protocol.  Signed 18 November 1987.  Ottawa,
       Canada.

Fuller and Hobson.  1986.  [reserved]

Melacon and  Lech.  1983.  [reserved]
APPENDIX A, Page 20

-------
A"g"st:i.  '996	DRAFT




Tanabe.  1988. [reserved]
                                                              APPENDIX A, Page 21

-------
                APPENDIX C



SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDANCE ON LITERATURE SEARCH

-------
 August I!. 1996	     DRAFT

                                    APPENDIX C
         SUPPLEMENTAL GUIDANCE ON LITERATURE SEARCH
       A literature search is conducted to obtain information on contaminants of concern,
 their potential ecological effects, and species of concern.  This appendix is separated into two
 sections; Section C-l describes the information necessary for the literature review portion of
 an ecological nsk assessment.  Topics include information for exposure profiles,
 bioavailability or bioconcentration factors for various compounds, life-history information for
 the species of concern or the surrogate species, and an ecological effects profile.  Section C-2
 lists information sources and techniques for a literature search and review.  Topics include a
 discussion of how to select  key words on which to base a search and various sources of
 information (i.e., databases, scientific abstracts, literature reviews, journal articles, and
 govemmeht documents). Threatened and endangered species are discussed separately due to
 the unique databases and information sources available  for these species.

       Prior to conducting a literature search, it is important to determine what information is
 needed for the ecological risk assessment.  The questions raised in Section D-l must be
 thoroughly reviewed, the information necessary to complete the assessment must  be
 determined, and the  purpose of the assessment must be  clearly defined. Once these activities
 are completed, the actual literature search can begin.  These activities will  assist in focusing
 and streamlining the search.
C-1    LITERATURE REVIEW FOR AN ECOLOGICAL RISK ASSESSMENT

       Specific information.  During problem formulation, the risk assessor must
determine what information is needed for the nsk assessment.  For example, if the nsk
assessment will estimate the effects of lead contamination of soils on terrestrial vertebrates,
then literature information on the effects of dissolved lead to fish would not be relevant.  The
type and form of the contaminant and the biological species of concern often can focus the
literature search.  For example, the toxicity of organometallic compounds is quite different
from the comparable inorganic  forms.  Different isomers of organic compounds also can  have
different toxic effects.

       Reports of toxicity tests should be reviewed critically to ensure that the study was
scientifically sound. For example, a report should specify the exposure routes, measures of
effect and exposure, and the full study design.  Moreover, whether the investigator used
accepted scientific techniques should be determined.

       The exposure route used in the study should also be comparable  to the exposure route
in the nsk assessment.  Data reported for studies where exposure is by injection or gavage are

                                                                   APPENDIX C, Page 1

-------
August Z!.  ! 996                                        	DRAFT

not directly comparable to dietary exposure studies.  Therefore, an uncertainty factor might
need to be included in the nsk assessment  study design, or the toxicity report should not be
used in the nsk assessment.

       To use some data reported in the literature, dose conversions are necessary to estimate
toxiciry levels for species other than those  tested.  Doses for many laboratory studies are
reported m terms of mg contaminant/kg diet. That expression should be  converted  to mg
contaminant/kg bodyweight/day, so that estimates of an equivalent dose in another species  can
be scaled appropriately. Average ingesuon rate and body weight  for a species often are
reported in the original toxiciry study.  If not, estimates of those data can be  obtained from
other literature sources to make the dose conversion:

  Dose =    (mg contaminant/kg diet) x  ingestion rate (kg/day)  x
             (I/body weight (kg)).

       Exposure profile.  Once contaminants of concern  are selected for the ecological risk
assessment, a general overview of the contaminants' physical  and chemical properties is
needed.  The  fate and transport of contaminants in the environment determines how biota are
likely to be exposed.  Many  contaminants undergo degradation (e.g., hydrolysis, photolysis,
rrucrobial) after release into the environment. Degradation can affect toxiciry, persistence,
and fate  and transport of compounds.  Developing  an exposure profile for a contaminant
requires  information regarding inherent properties of the contaminant that can affect fate and
transport or bioavailability.

       Bioavailability.  Of particular importance  in an ecological risk assessment is the
bioavailabihty of site contaminants in the environment. Bioavailability influences exposure
levels for the biota. Some factors that affect bioavailability of contaminants in soil  and
sediment include the proportion of the medium composed of organic matter, grain size of the
medium, and  its pH.  The aerobic state of sediments is important  because it often affects the
chemical form of contaminants.  Those physical properties of the  media can change the
chemical form of a contaminant to a form  that is more or less  toxic than  the original
contaminant.  Many contaminants adsorb to organic matter, which can make them less
bio?vailable.

       Environmental factors that influence the bioavailability of  a contaminant in water are
important to aquatic risk assessments.  Factors including pH, hardness, or aerobic status can
determine both the chemical form and uptake of contaminants by biota.  Other environmental
factors can influence how organisms process contaminants.  For example, as  water
temperatures  nsc, metabolism of  fish and aquatic invertebrates increases, and the rate of
uptake of a contaminant from water can increase.
 APPENDIX C, Page 2

-------
August 21.  1996	DRAFT

       If the literature search on the contaminants of concern reveals information on the
bioavailability of a contaminant, then appropriate bioaccumulauon or bioconcentration factors
(BAFs or BCFs) for the contaminants should be determined.  If not readily available in the
literature, BAF or  BCF values can be estimated from studies that  report contaminant
concentrations in both the environmental exposure medium (e.g., sediments) and in the
exposed biota (e.g., benthic macroinvertebrates).  Caution is necessary,  however, when
extrapolating BAF or BCF values estimated for one ecosystem to  another ecosystem.

       Life history.  Because it is impossible  and unnecessary to model an entire ecosystem,
the selection of assessment endpoints and associated  species of concern, and measurement
endpoints (including those  for a surrogate species if necessary) are fundamental to a
successful risk assessment.  This process is described in Steps 3 and 4.   Once assessment and
measurement endpoints are agreed to by the risk assessor and risk manager, life history
information for the species of concern or the surrogate  species should be collected.  Patterns
of activity and feeding habits of a species affect their potential for exposure to a contaminant
(e.g., grooming activities of small mammals, egestion of bone and hide  by owls).  Other
important exposure factors  include food and water ingestion rates, composition of the diet,
average body weight, home range size, and seasonal  activities such as migration.

       Ecological effects profile.  Once contaminants and species of concern are selected
during  problem formulation, a general overview of toxicity and  toxic mechanisms is  needed.
The distinction between the species of concern representing an assessment endpoint and a
surrogate species representing a measurement endpoint  is important. The species of  concern
is the species that might be threatened by contaminants at the site.  A surrogate species is
used when  it is not appropriate or possible to measure attributes of the species of concern.  A
surrogate for a species of concern should be sufficiently similar biologically to allow
inferences on likely effects in the species  of concern.

       The ecological effects profile should include toxicity information from the  literature
for each possible exposure  route. A lowest-observed-adverse-effect level (LOAEL) and the
no-observed-adverse-effect  level (NOAEL) for the species of concern or its surrogate should
be obtained.  Unfortunately, these toxicity values are available for few wildlife species and
contaminants. If used with caution, toxicity data from  a closely related  species can  be used to
estimate a LOAEL and a NOAEL for a receptor species.
C-2   INFORMATION SOURCES

       This section describes information sources that can be examined to find the
information described in Section 3-1.  A logical and focused literature search will reduce the
time spent searching for pertinent information.
                                                                      APPENDIX C, Page 3

-------
 August 21.  1996                                                                    DRAFT

       A first step in a literature search is to develop a search strategy, including a list of key
 words.  The next step is to review computerized databases, either on-line or CD-ROM-based
 information systems.  These systems can be searched based on a number of parameters.

       Scientific abstracts that contain up-to-date listings of current, published information
 also are useful information sources.  Most abstracts are indexed by author or subject.
 Toxicity studies  and  information on wildlife life-histories often are summarized in literature
 reviews published in books or peer-reviewed journals. Original reports of toxicity studies can
 be identified in the literature section  of published documents.  The original article in which
 data are reported must be reviewed before the data are cited in a nsk assessment.

       Moore (1980) provides further insights on conducting a literature search, including
 techniques  to limit a  search, selection of key words, and the location of dissertations.
 Moore's examples relate to information on wildlife species, but apply to all components of an
ecological risk assessment.

       Key words.  Once the risk assessor has prepared a list of the specific information
 needed for  the nsk assessment, a list of key words can be developed. Card catalogs,
 abstracts, on-line databases, and other reference  materials  usually are indexed on a limited set
of key  words.  Therefore, the key words used to  search for information must be considered
carefully.

       Useful key words include the  contaminant of concern, the biological species of
concern, the type of toxicity information wanted, or other associated words.  In addition,
related subjects can be used as key words.  However, it usually is necessary to limit
 peripheral aspects of  the subject in order to narrow the search.  For example, if the risk
 assessor needs information on the toxicity of lead in soils to moles, then requiring that both
 "lead" and  "mole" are among the key words can focus the literature search. If the risk
 assessor needs information on a given plant or animal species (or group of species),  key
 words should include both the scientific name (e.g., genus and species names or order 01
 family  names) and an accepted common name(s). The projected  use of the data in the risk
 assessment helps determine which key words are most appropriate.

       If someone outside of the risk assessment team will conduct the literature search, it is
 important that they understand both the key words and the study  objectives for the data.

       Databa»«*.  Databases are usually on-line or CD-ROM-based information systems.
 These systems can be searched using a number  of parameters.  Pnor to searching databases,
 the risk assessor should determine which  database(s) is most likely to provide the information
 needed  for the nsk assessment. For example, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's
 (EPA's) AQU1RE database (AQUatic Information REtrieval database) provides information
 speciScally on the toxicity of chemicals to  aquatic plants and animals.  U.S. EPA's  IRIS

 APPENDIX C, Page 4

-------
August :i.  1996	                                       DR\FT

(Integrated Risk Information System) provides information on human health risks (e.g..
references to original toxicity studies) and regulatory information (e.g., reference doses and
cancer potency factors) for a variety of chemicals.  Other useful databases include the
National Library of Medicine's HSDB (Hazardous Subs'inces Data Bank) and the National
Center for Environmental Assessment's HEAST Tables (Health Effects Assessment  Summary
Tables).   Commercially available databases include BIOSIS (Biosciences Information
Services) and ENVTROLINE.

       Several states have Fish and Wildlife  History Databases or Academy of Science
databases, which often provide useful information on the life-histories of plants  and  animals
in the state.  State databases are particularly useful for obtaining information on endemic
organisms or geographically distinct habitats.

       Databases searches can yield a large amount of information in a short period of time.
Thus, if the  key words do not accurately describe the information needed, database searches
can provide  a large amount of irrelevant information. Access fees and on-line fees can apply;
therefore, the selection of relevant key  words and an organized approach to the search will
reduce the time and expense of on-line literature searches.

       Abstracts.  Published abstract compilations  (e.g.. Biological Abstracts, Chemical
Abstracts, Applied Ecology Abstracts) contain up-to-
-------
 August 21.  1996                                                                   DRAFT

 and Wildlife Services (U.S.  FWS) has published several contaminant-specific documents that
 list toxicological data on terrestrial, aquatic, and avian studies (e.g., Eisler, 1988). The U.S.
 EPA publishes ambient water quality cntena documents (e.g.. U.S. EPA,  1985)  that list all
 the data used to calculate those values.  Some  literature reviews critically evaluate the original
 studies (e.g., toxicity data reviewed by Long and Morgan, 1990).  The Wildlife Exposure
 Factors Handbook (U.S. EPA, 1993a,b)  provides pertinent information on exposure factors
 (e.g., body weights, food mgesuon rates, dietary composition, home range size)  for 34
 selected wildlife species.

       Literature reviews can provide  an extensive  amount of information. However, the risk
 assessor must obtain a copy  of the original of any studies identified in a literature review that
 will be used in the nsk assessment.  The original study must be  reviewed  and evaluated
 before it can be used in the nsk assessment.  Otherwise,  the results of the nsk assessment
 could be based on incorrect and incompleie* information about a  study.

       References cited in previous studies.  Pertinent studies can be identified in the
 literature cited section of published documents  that  are relevant to  the risk assessment, and
 one often can  identify several investigators who work on related studies.  Searching for
 references in the literature cited section of published documents, however, takes  time and
 might not  be very effective.  However, this is probably the most common  approach to
 identifying relevant  literature.  If this approach  is selected, the best place to start is a review
 article.  Many journals do not list the title of a  citation for an article, however, limiting the
 usefulness of this technique.  Also, it can be difficult to retrieve  literature cited in obscure or
 foreign journals or in unpublished masters' theses or doctoral dissertations. Although this
 approach tends to be more time consuming than the other literature search approaches
 described above, it probably  is the most common approach used  to locate information for a
 risk assessment.

       Journal articles, books, government documents.  There arc a variety of
journals, books, and government documents that contain mformauon useful to nsk
 assessments.  The same requirement for retrieving the original reports for any informs''0^
 used in the nsk assessment described for other  information sources applies to these sources.

       Threatened and endangered  species.  Threatened and endangered species are of
 concern to  both federal and state governments.   When  conducting  an ecological nsk
 assessment, it often  is necessary  to determine or estimate  the effects of site contaminants to
 federal threatened or endangered species.  In addition,  other special-status  species (e.g.,
 species listed by a state as endangered or threatened within the state)  also can be the focus of
 the assessment. During the problem formulation step,  the U.S. FWS or state Natural Heritage
 programs should be contacted to determine if these species are present or  might  be present on
 or near a Superfund site.
 APPENDIX C, Page 6

-------
 August 21. 1996	DRAFT

       Once the presence of a special-status species is confirmed or considered likely,
 information on (his species,  as well as on surrogate species, should be included in the
 literature search.  There are  specific federal and state programs that deal with issues related to
 special-status species, and often there is more information  available for these than for non-
 special-status species used as surrogates for an ecological nsk assessment.  Nonetheless, the
 use of surrogate species usually is  necessary when an assessment endpoim is a special-status
 species.
REFERENCES

Eisler, R.  1988.  Lead Hazards to Fish, Wildlife, and Invertebrates:  A Synoptic Review.
       U.S.  Fish and Wildlife Service Patuxent Wildlife Research Center, Laurel MD:  U.S.
       Department of the Interior, Biological Report 85(1.14), Contaminant Hazard Reviews
       Rep.  No. 14.

Long and Morgan.  1990.    [reserved]

Moore.  1980.  [reserved]

U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993a.  Wildlife Exposure Factors
       Handbook Volume I.  Washington, DC:  Office of Research and Development;
       EPA/600/R-93/I87a.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1993b.  Wildlife Exposure Factors
       Handbook Volume II:  Appendix. Washington,  DC:  Office of Research and
       Development; EPA/600/R-93/187b.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA).  1985.  Ambient  Water Quality Criteria
      for Copper-1984.  Washington, DC:  Office of Water. Regulations and Standards,
       Catena and Standards Division.  EPA/440/5-84-031.  PB85-227023.
                                                                     APPENDIX C, Page 7

-------
        APPENDIX D



STATISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS

-------
          1996 _ _                                    DRAFT
                                    APPENDIX D
                       STATISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS
       In the biological sciences, statistical tests often are needed to support decisions based
on alternative hypotheses because of the natural variability in the systems under investigation.
A statistical test examines a set of sample  data, and, based on an expected distribution of the
data, leads  to a decision on whether to accept the hypothesis underlying the expected
distribution or whether to reject that hypothesis and accept an alternative one, The null
hypothesis  is a  hypothesis of no differences. It usually is formulated for the express purpose
of being rejected.  The alternative or test hypothesis is an operational statement of the
investigator s research hypothesis.  An example of a null hypothesis for toxicity testing would
be that mortality of water fleas exposed to water from a contaminated area is no different
than mortality of water fleas exposed to water from an otherwise similar, but uncontaminated
area.  An example of the test hypothesis is that mortality of water fleas exposed to water
from the contaminated area is higher than mortality of water fleas exposed to uncontaminated
water.

D-1    TYPE I  AND TYPE II  ERROR

       There are two types of correct decisions for  hypothesis testing:  (1) accepting a true
null hypothesis, and (2) rejecting a false null hypothesis.  There  also are two types of
incorrect decisions:  rejecting a true null hypothesis, called Type I error; and accepting a false
null hypothesis, called Type n error.
       When designing a test of a                       HIGHLIGHT BOX D-1
hypothesis, one should decide what                Rule of Thumb for Sample Size
magnitude of Type I error (rejection of a
true null hypothesis) is acceptable.  Even               An empirically determined rule of
when sampling from a population of known      thumb for field sampling for tissue  residue
parameters, there are always some sample        levels or b.oaccumulauon studies is that
     ,  . ,   ,    ,       ,•„      ,  .,„  Tf       a = O.I0 is an acceptable level of statistical
sets which, by chance, differ markedly.  If        .               v
                     f      i      i   j .        significance.
one allows 5  percent of samples to lead to a
Type I  error,  then one would on average      '-^••^•••^••••••••••••••••^^••i
reject a true null hypothesis for 5 out  of
every 100 samples taken.  In other words, we would be  confident that, 95 times out of 100,
one would not reject the null hypothesis of no difference "by mistake" (because chance alone
produced such deviant results).  When the probability  of Type I error (commonly  symbolized
by a) is set at 0.05, this is called a significance level of 5 percent  Setting a significance
level of 5  percent is a widely accepted convention in most experimental sciences, but it is just
that, a  convention.  One can demand more confidence (e.g., a = 0.01) or less confidence
(e.g., a = 0.10) that the hypothesis of no difference is not rejected by mistake.

                                                                     APPENDIX D, Page 1

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

       If one requires more confidence for a given sample size that the null hypothesis is not
rejected by mistake (e.g., a = 0.01), the chances of Type H error increase. In other words,
the chance increases that one will mistakenly  accept a faJse null hypothesis (e.g., mistakenly
believe  that the contaminated water from the site has no effect on mortality of water fleas).
The probability of Type n error is  commonly denoted by (3.  Thus:

       p (.Type I error) = a
       p (Type II error) =  P

However, if one tnes to evaluate the probability of Type II error (accepting a false hypothesis
of no difference), there is a problem.  If the null hypothesis is false,.then some other
hypothesis must be true, but unless one can specify a second  hypothesis, one can't determine
the probability of Type El error.  This leads to another important statistical consideration,
which is ;he power of a study design and the statistical test used to evaluate the  results.

D-2   STATISTICAL POWER

       The power of a statistical test is  equal to (1   P) and is equal to the probability  of
rejecting the null  hypothesis (no difference) when it should  be rejected (i.e., it  is false) and
the specified  alternative hypothesis  is true. Obviously, for any given test (e.g., a toxicity test
at  a Superfund site), one would like the quantity (1  - P) to be as  large as possible (and P to
be as small as possible). Because one generally cannot specify a given alternative hypothesis
(e.g.. mortality should be 40 percent in the exposed population), the power of a test is
generally evaluated on the basis of  a continuum of possible alternative hypotheses.

       Ideally, one  would specify both a  and P before an experiment or test of the hypothesis
is  conducted.  In  practice, it is usual to specify a (e.g., 0.05) and the sample size because the
exact alternative hypothesis cannot  be specified.1 Given the inverse relationship  between the
likelihood of making Type I and Type  n errors, a decrease  in a will increase p for any given
sample size.

       To improve  the statistical  power of a test (i.e., reduce  P), while keeping a constant,
one can either increase  the sample size (N) or change the nature  of the statistical test.  Some
statistical tests are more powerful than others, but it is important that the assumptions-
required by the test (e.g., normality of the underlying distribution) are met for  the test  results
to be valid.  In general, the more powerful tests rely on more assumptions about the data  (see
Section D-3).

       Alternative study designs  sometimes can improve statistical power (e.g., stratified
random sampling compared with random sampling  if something  is known about  the  history
    'With a specified aJtemauve hypothesis, once a and (he sample size (N) are set, P is determined.

 APPENDIX  D. Page 2

-------
August 21. 1996	DRAFT

and location of contaminant release).  A discussion of different statistical sampling designs is
beyond the scope of this guidance, however.  Several references provide guidance on
statistical sampling design, sampling techniques, and statistical analyses appropriate  for
hazardous waste sites (e.g., see Cochran, 1977; Green,  1979;  Gilbert,  1987; Ott, 1995).

       One also can improve  the power of a statistical  test if the test  hypothesis is more
specific than "two populations are different," and,  instead, predicts the direction of a
difference (e.g.. mortality in the exposed group is  higher than mortality in the control group).
When one can predict the direction of a difference between groups, one uses a one-tailed
statistical test;  otherwise, one  must use the less powerful two-tailed version of the test.
                                     Highlight Box 0-2
         Key Points About Statistical Significance, Power, and Sample Size

     (1)     The significance level for a statistical test, a, is the probability that a statistical test will
            yield a value under which  the null hypothesis will be rejected when it is in fact true.
            In other words, a defines the probability of committing Type I error (e.g., concluding
            that the site medium is toxic when it is in fact not toxic to the test organisms).

     (2)     The value of P is the probability that a statistical test will yield a value under which the
            null hypothesis is  accepted when it is in fact false. Thus, |3 defines the probability of
            committing Type £1 error (e.g., concluding that the site medium is not toxic when it is
            in fact toxic to the test organisms).

     (3)     The power of a statistical test (i.e., 1  • P) indicates the probability of rejecting the null
            hypotheses  when  it is false (and therefore should be rejected).  Thus, one wants the
            power of a statistical test to be as high as possible.

     (4)     Power is related to the nature of the statistical test chosen.  A one-tailed test is more
            powerful than a two-tailed test.  If the alternative to the null hypothesis can state the
            expected direction of a difference between a test and control group, one can use the more
            powerful one-tailed test

     (5)     The power of any statistical test increases with increasing sample size.
D-3   STATISTICAL MODEL

       Associated with every statistical test is a model and  a measurement requirement.  Each
statistical test is valid only under certain conditions. Sometimes, it is possible to test whether
the conditions of a particular statistical model are met, but more often, one has to assume that
                                                                          APPENDIX D, Page 3

-------
 Augusi 21.  1996	DRAFT

 they are or are not met based on an understanding of the underlying population and sampling
 design.  The  conditions that must be met for a statistical test to be valid often are referred to
 as the assumptions of the test.

       The most powerful statistical tests (see previous section) are those with the most
 extensive assumptions.  In general, parametric statistical tests [e.g., t test, F test) are the most
 powerful tests, but also have the most exacting assumptions to be met:

       (1)     The "observations" must be independent;

       (2)     The 'observations" must be drawn  from a population that is normally
              distributed;

       (3)     The populations must have the same variance (or in special cases, a known
              ratio of variances); and

       (4)     The variables must have been measured at least on  an  interval scale so that it is
              possible  to use arithmetic operations (e.g., addition, multiplication) on the
              measured values (Siegel, 1956).

The second and  third assumptions are the ones most often violated by the types of data
associated with biological hypothesis testing.  Often, distributions  are positively skewed (i.e.,
longer upper  than lower tail of the distribution).  Sometimes,  it is  possible to transform data
from positively skewed distributions to normal distributions using  a mathematical function.
For example, many biological parameters turn out to be log-normally distributed (i.e., if one
takes the log  of  all measures, the resulting values  are normally distributed).  Sometimes,
however, the  underlying shape of the distribution cannot be normalized (e.g., it is bimodal).

       When the assumptions required for parametric  tests are not met, one must use
 nonparametric statistics (e.g., median test, chi-squared test).  Nonparametric tests are ia
 general less powerful than parametric  tests because less is known  or assumed about the shape
 of the underlying distributions.   However,  the loss in power can be compensated for uy an
 increase in sample size, which is the concept behind measures of  power-efficiency.

       Power-efficiency  reflects the increase  in sample  size necessary to make test B (e.g., a
 nonparametnc test) as  efficient or powerful as test A (e.g.,  a  parametric test).  A power-
 efficiency of 80 percent  means that in order for test B to be as powerful as test A, one must
 make 10 observations for test B for every 8 observations for  test  A.

       For further information on statistical tests, consult references  on the topic (e.g.,  sec
 references  below).
 .APPENDIX D.  Page 4

-------
AugUS[:i-1996	                                   DRAFT

REFERENCES


Cochran, W G.  1977  Sampling Techniques.  3rd ed.  New York, NY' John Wilev and
       Sons, Inc.                                                           }


Gilbert, R.O.  1987. Statistical Methods for Environmental Pollution Monitoring. New York
       NY:  Reinhold.


Green, R. H.  1979. Sampling Design and Statistical Methods for Environmental Biologists
       New York, NY:  Wiley.                            '                        '


Ott, W.R.   1995. Environmental Statistics and Data Analysis.  Boca Raton, FL:  CRC Press,
       Inc., Lewis Publishers.

Siegel, S.  1956.  Non-parametric Statistics.  New York, NY:  McGraw-Hill.
                                                                  APPENDIX D, Page 5

-------